Mercedes Benz 2006 Slk 280 Users Manual 171_BA.boo
2015-02-05
: Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz-2006-Slk-280-Users-Manual-398095 mercedes-benz-2006-slk-280-users-manual-398095 mercedes-benz pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 481
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG Ê1/tlqsË 1715847681 Order No. 6515 3255 13 Part No. 171 584 76 81 USA Edition A 2006 Operator’s Manual SLK-Class Operator’s Manual SLK-Class SLK 280 SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz. Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service. Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure, and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of time: 앫 Please read this manual carefully, then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference. 앫 Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz. 앫 Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and occupants. We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC A DaimlerChrysler Company Contents Introduction .......................................... 9 Product information................................ 9 Operator’s Manual ............................... 10 Service and warranty information .. 10 Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11 Maintenance .................................. 12 Roadside Assistance ...................... 12 Change of address or ownership.... 12 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada......................... 13 Where to find it.................................... 14 Symbols............................................... 15 Operating safety .................................. 16 Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16 Problems with your vehicle.................. 17 Reporting safety defects...................... 18 Reporting safety defects ................ 18 Vehicle data recording......................... 19 Information regarding electronic recording devices........................... 19 At a glance .......................................... 21 Cockpit................................................. 22 Instrument cluster ................................ 24 Multifunction steering wheel ................ 26 Center console ..................................... 28 Upper part ...................................... 28 Lower part ...................................... 29 Overhead control panel ........................ 30 Door control panel................................ 31 Getting started ................................... Unlocking ............................................. Unlocking with the SmartKey ......... Starter switch positions.................. Adjusting .............................................. Seats .............................................. Steering wheel................................ Mirrors............................................ Driving.................................................. Fastening the seat belts ................. Starting the engine ......................... Parking brake ................................. Driving ............................................ Switching on headlamps................. Turn signals .................................... Windshield wipers........................... Problems while driving.................... Parking and locking.............................. Parking brake ................................. Switching off headlamps................. Turning off engine........................... Locking ........................................... 33 34 34 36 38 38 42 45 47 47 50 52 53 55 55 56 58 59 59 60 61 62 Contents Safety and Security ........................... Occupant safety................................... Air bags .......................................... Seat belts ....................................... Children in the vehicle.................... Panic alarm .......................................... Activating ....................................... Deactivating ................................... Driving safety systems......................... ABS ................................................ BAS ................................................ ESP® ............................................... Anti-theft systems................................ Immobilizer..................................... Anti-theft alarm system .................. Tow-away alarm ............................. 63 64 65 71 75 80 81 81 82 82 83 84 87 87 87 88 Controls in detail ............................... 91 Locking and unlocking ......................... 92 SmartKey ....................................... 92 Opening the doors from the inside. 97 Opening the trunk .......................... 98 Closing the trunk............................ 99 Trunk lid emergency release ........ 100 Automatic central locking ............ 101 Locking and unlocking from the inside ..................................... 102 Seats ................................................. 104 Seat heating*............................... 104 AIRSCARF neck-level heating* ..... 105 Memory function* ............................. 107 Storing positions into memory ..... 108 Recalling positions from memory . 108 Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position (parking aid)....... 108 Lighting.............................................. 110 Exterior lamp switch..................... 110 Combination switch ..................... 114 Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* (SLK 280, SLK 350: with Bi-Xenon* headlamps and without Sport Package*)........................... 115 Hazard warning flasher ................ Interior lighting ............................ Door entry lamps ......................... Instrument cluster ............................. Instrument cluster illumination .... Tachometer.................................. Outside temperature indicator ..... Trip odometer .............................. Clock............................................ Control system .................................. Multifunction display.................... Multifunction steering wheel........ Menus .......................................... Standard display menu ................ AUDIO menu ................................ NAV* menu.................................. Vehicle status message memory menu.............................. Settings menu.............................. Trip computer menu..................... TEL menu* ................................... Manual transmission ......................... Shifting into reverse..................... Automatic transmission*................... Gear selector lever position ......... Gear ranges ................................. 117 117 119 120 120 121 121 122 122 123 123 124 126 128 129 132 132 134 149 151 155 156 157 159 160 Contents Driving tips................................... Automatic shift program .............. Gear selector lever one-touch gearshifting .................................. Steering wheel gearshift control one-touch gearshifting ................. Manual shift program SLK 55 AMG................................. Emergency operation (Limp Home Mode) ...................... Good visibility .................................... Headlamp cleaning system* ........ Rear view mirrors......................... Sun visors .................................... Rear window defroster ................. Climate control .................................. Switching climate control system on/off .............................. Setting the temperature............... Adjusting air distribution.............. Adjusting air volume .................... Basic settings............................... Defrosting windshield .................. Air recirculation mode.................. Air conditioning............................ Residual engine heat utilization.... 162 163 164 165 169 172 173 173 173 176 177 178 181 181 182 183 183 184 185 187 188 Automatic climate control* ................ 190 Deactivating the climate control system .............................. 194 Operating the climate control system in automatic mode............ 194 Setting the temperature................ 195 Adjusting air distribution............... 196 Adjusting air volume ..................... 197 Defrosting windshield ................... 197 Maximum cooling MAX COOL ....... 199 Air recirculation mode .................. 199 Air conditioning............................. 200 Residual heat and ventilation........ 202 Audio system...................................... 203 Audio and telephone*, operation.. 203 Operating safety ........................... 203 Operating and display elements.... 204 Button and soft key operation....... 206 Operation...................................... 206 Radio operation ............................ 209 Introduction to satellite radio* (USA only)..................................... 214 CD mode....................................... 219 GSM network phones ................... 229 TDMA or CDMA network phones .. 236 Emergency calls “911”.................. 243 Power windows .................................. 246 Opening and closing the windows........................................ 246 Synchronizing power windows...... 251 Retractable hardtop ........................... 252 Opening and closing the retractable hardtop....................... 252 Wind screen.................................. 259 Driving systems.................................. 260 Cruise control ............................... 260 Loading .............................................. 265 Roof rack ...................................... 265 Useful features................................... 266 Storage compartments ................. 266 Shelf behind roll bars.................... 268 Cup holder .................................... 268 Ashtray ......................................... 269 Cigarette lighter............................ 270 Power outlet ................................. 271 Floormat (driver’s side only) ......... 271 Telephone* ................................... 272 Tele Aid......................................... 273 Garage door opener*.................... 281 Heated steering wheel* (SLK 280, SLK 350, Canada only). 288 Contents Operation ......................................... The first 1000 miles (1500 km)......... Driving instructions............................ Drive sensibly – save fuel ............. Drinking and driving ..................... Pedals .......................................... Power assistance ......................... Brakes .......................................... Driving off..................................... Parking ......................................... Tires ............................................. Hydroplaning ................................ Tire traction.................................. Tire speed rating .......................... Winter driving instructions ........... Standing water ............................. Passenger compartment .............. Driving abroad.............................. Control and operation of radio transmitter ................................... Catalytic converter ....................... Emission control........................... Coolant temperature .................... 291 292 293 293 293 293 293 294 296 296 297 297 298 298 299 300 301 301 301 302 302 303 At the gas station .............................. Refueling ...................................... Check regularly and before a long trip..................................... Engine compartment ......................... Hood ............................................ Engine oil ..................................... Transmission fluid level* .............. Coolant level ................................ Battery ......................................... Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*......... Tires and wheels................................ Important guidelines .................... Tire care and maintenance........... Direction of rotation..................... Loading the vehicle ...................... Recommended tire inflation pressure....................................... Checking tire inflation pressure ... MOExtended system* .................. Tire labeling.................................. Load identification ....................... 304 304 305 307 307 308 313 313 314 315 317 317 318 320 320 327 329 333 334 338 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................. Maximum tire load ....................... Maximum tire inflation pressure .. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (U.S. vehicles) ............. Tire ply material ........................... Tire and loading terminology........ Rotating tires ............................... Winter driving .................................... Winter tires .................................. Snow chains................................. Maintenance...................................... Clearing the maintenance service indicator .......................... Maintenance service term exceeded ..................................... Calling up the maintenance service indicator .......................... Resetting the maintenance service indicator .......................... Vehicle care....................................... Cleaning and care of vehicle ........ 339 340 341 341 343 344 347 348 348 349 350 351 351 351 352 353 353 Contents Practical hints ................................. What to do if … .................................. Lamps in instrument cluster ........ Lamp in center console................ Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display.................... Where will I find...? ............................ First aid kit................................... Vehicle tool kit, vehicle jack......... Spare wheel with collapsible tire.. Spare wheel bolts ........................ Unlocking/locking in an emergency.. Unlocking the vehicle................... Locking the vehicle ...................... Manually unlocking the gear selector lever (automatic transmission*) ........... Opening/closing in an emergency..... Raising retractable hardtop manually ...................................... Replacing SmartKey batteries ........... SmartKey ..................................... 361 362 362 367 368 388 388 388 391 392 394 394 395 396 397 397 398 399 Replacing bulbs .................................. 400 Bulbs............................................. 401 Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 403 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 405 Replacing wiper blades....................... 406 Removing wiper blades ................. 406 Installing wiper blades .................. 407 Flat tire............................................... 408 Preparing the vehicle .................... 408 Sealing tires with TIREFIT.............. 408 Mounting the spare wheel ............ 412 Battery................................................ 421 Disconnecting the battery............. 422 Removing the battery.................... 422 Charging and reinstalling battery .. 423 Reconnecting the battery.............. 423 Jump starting...................................... 424 Towing the vehicle.............................. 426 Installing towing eye bolt .............. 428 Fuses.................................................. 430 Aids for replacing fuses ................ 430 Main fuse box in passenger compartment ................................ 431 Fuse box in engine compartment.. 432 Technical data .................................. 433 Parts service ...................................... 434 Warranty coverage ............................. 435 Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet ...................... 435 Identification labels ............................ 436 Layout of poly-V-belt drive.................. 437 SLK 280, SLK 350 ........................ 437 SLK 55 AMG ................................. 437 Engine ................................................ 438 Rims and tires .................................... 439 Same size tires ............................. 441 Mixed size tires............................. 443 Spare wheel with collapsible tire .. 445 Electrical system ................................ 446 Main Dimensions................................ 447 Weights .............................................. 448 Contents Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ......... Capacities .................................... Engine oils.................................... Engine oil additives ...................... Air conditioning refrigerant .......... Brake fluid .................................... Premium unleaded gasoline ......... Fuel requirements ........................ Gasoline additives ........................ Coolants....................................... Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system* ......... 449 449 451 451 451 451 452 452 453 453 456 Technical terms............................... 457 Index................................................. 465 Introduction Product information 왔 Product information Please observe the following in your own best interest: We recommend using genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model. We have tested these parts to determine their reliability, safety and special suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety, performance or reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use them. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will be performed. 9 Introduction Operator’s Manual This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal of useful information. We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual. Therefore, you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures. 10 We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle. Service and warranty information 앫 New Car Limited Warranty Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle. 앫 Emission System Warranty 앫 Emission Performance Warranty 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont only) 앫 State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws) If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator’s Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures. The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle. The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz, including: Introduction Operator’s Manual Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz automobiles Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18000 miles (approx. 29000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair, (2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for its repair, or (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days. Written notification should be sent to us, not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer Assistance Center, One Mercedes Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350. 11 Introduction Operator’s Manual Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership The Maintenance Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals. The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory-trained technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number If you change your address, be sure to send in the “Change of Address Notice” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise. Always have the Maintenance Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada) will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. For additional information refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program Brochure in your vehicle literature portfolio. 12 If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator. If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Introduction Operator’s Manual Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that: Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to: 앫 service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available, In the USA: 앫 unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts, 앫 gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can cause engine damage. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 13 Introduction Where to find it This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information for you, the vehicle operator. Each section has its own reference color. At a glance Here you will find an overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver’s seat. Controls in detail Technical data Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed in your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you. All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section. Getting started Operation Here you will find all the information you need for your first drive. You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle. Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehicle. Practical hints Safety and Security Here you will find descriptions of the safety and security features of your vehicle. 14 This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter. Indexes The glossary provides explanations of the most important technical terms. The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly and easily. The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation: 앫 this Operator’s Manual 앫 the Maintenance Booklet Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment options installed in your vehicle. Introduction Symbols 왔 Symbols Trademarks: 앫 ESP® is a registered trademark of DaimlerChrysler. 앫 HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Prince, a Johnson Controls Company. 앫 BabySmartTM 앫 SIRIUS and related marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite Radio Inc. The following symbols are found in this Operator’s Manual: 왘 This symbol points to instructions for you to follow. * 왘 A number of these symbols appearing in succession indicates a multiple-step procedure. Optional equipment is identified with an asterisk. Since standard equipment varies between models, the descriptions and illustrations in this manual may differ slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle. is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp. Warning! 컄 Page 컄컄 This continuation symbol marks an interrupted procedure which will be continued on the next page. -> In the glossary of technical terms, this symbol is used to indicate cross-references to term definitions. Display Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in the type shown here. G Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. ! Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle. This symbol tells you where to look for further information on a topic. i Helpful hints or further information you may find useful. 15 Introduction Operating safety Warning! G Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning. Because the vehicle’s electronic components are interconnected, any modification made may produce an undesired effect on other systems. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for repairs or modifications to electronic components. Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle. Some safety systems only function while the engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving. 16 Warning! G Heavy blows against the vehicle undercarriage or tires/wheels, for example when running over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole, may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety or your vehicle. If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road. Inspect the vehicle undercarriage or tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs. Proper use of the vehicle Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are familiar with the following information and rules: 앫 the safety precautions in this manual 앫 the “Technical data” section (컄 page 433) in this manual 앫 the traffic rules and regulations 앫 the motor vehicle laws and safety standards Warning! G Various labels are attached to your vehicle. These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of various risks. You should not remove any of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and/or personal injury. Introduction Problems with your vehicle 왔 Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses: In the USA: Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada: Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 17 Introduction Reporting safety defects For the USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”. Reporting safety defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. 18 Introduction Vehicle data recording 왔 Vehicle data recording Information regarding electronic recording devices (Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951) Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may transmit some data in certain accidents. This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety. DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others 앫 for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes 앫 with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee 앫 in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency 앫 for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or 앫 as otherwise required or permitted by law. Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system. 19 20 At a glance Cockpit Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Center console Overhead control panel Door control panel 21 At a glance Cockpit 22 At a glance Cockpit Item 1 Automatic transmission*: Steering wheel gearshift control* SLK 55 AMG: Steering wheel gearshift control 2 Multifunction steering wheel Page 165 167 26, 124 3 Horn Item Page a Steering wheel adjustment handle, manual 42 b Steering wheel adjustment lever, electrical* 43 Heated steering wheel* (SLK 280, SLK 350, Canada only) 288 c Headlamp cleaning* switch 173 d Hood lock release 307 4 Instrument cluster 24, 120 e Exterior lamp switch 55, 110 5 Overhead control panel 30, 117 f Combination switch 6 Glove box 266 7 Center console 28, 29 8 Sun sensor for automatic climate control* 9 Starter switch 앫 Turn signals 55 앫 Windshield wipers 56 앫 High beam headlamps 55 g Power window switches 36 h Door handle j Cruise control lever 246 97 260 23 At a glance Instrument cluster 24 At a glance Instrument cluster Item Page 128 Trip odometer 122 Automatic transmission*: Gear range indicator 51, 158 Automatic transmission*: Program mode 163, 169 Outside temperature indicator (or actual speed when selected) 138 364 indicator lamp, Canada only headlamp indicator lamp 4 Fuel reserve warning 364 55, 114 K Right turn signal 365 System (ABS) indicator lamp Program (ESP®) warning lamp USA only 3 Brake warning lamp, 84, 365 59, 363 363 Canada only 5 Speedometer with: - Antilock Brake indicator lamp ; Brake warning lamp, 304 55 indicator lamp v Electronic Stability 122 Restraint System (SRS) indicator lamp Page L Left turn signal lamp The arrow indicates that the fuel filler flap is on the rear right-hand side. Item 71, 366 3 Fuel gauge with: 1 Supplemental indicator lamp, USA only ± Engine malfunction A High beam 4 Clock 2 Tachometer with: ? Engine malfunction Page < Seat belt telltale 1 Multifunction display with: Main odometer Item 64, 366 6 Reset button 120 7 Knobs for instrument cluster illumination 120 82, 362 25 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Item Page 1 Multifunction display Operating control system 2 Selecting a submenu or setting the volume: Press button æ up/to increase ç down/to decrease 3 Telephone*: Press button s to take a call, or to dial a call t to end a call, or to reject an incoming call 26 120 123 Item 4 Moving within a menu: Press button j for next display k for previous display 5 Menu systems: Press button è for next menu · for previous menu Page At a glance Multifunction steering wheel i SLK 55 AMG: The steering wheel in this vehicle will vary from steering wheel shown. However, multifunction steering wheel symbols and feature description apply to AMG vehicles as well. 27 At a glance Center console Upper part Item Page 1 Cup holder 268 2 Audio system, or 129 COMAND* (see separate operating instructions) Page a AIRSCARF neck-level heating* switch, driver’s side 105 b Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 77, 367 c Climate control 178 3 AIRSCARF neck-level heating* switch, passenger-side 105 4 Seat heater* switch, passenger-side 104 5 Central unlocking switch 101 d Cigarette lighter 270 6 Hazard warning flasher switch 117 e Ashtray 269 7 Central locking switch 101 8 ESP® switch 9 Seat heater* switch, driver’s side 28 Item 84 104 Automatic climate control* 190 Rear window defroster switch 177 At a glance Center console Lower part Item Page Item Page 1 Automatic transmission*: Gear selector lever 157 6 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror switch 45, 173 Manual transmission: Gearshift lever 155 7 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror switch 45, 173 252 8 Exterior rear view mirrors adjustment switch 45, 173 3 Tow-away alarm deactivation switch 89 163, 169 4 Parking brake lever 52 9 Automatic transmission*: Program mode selector switch 2 Retractable hardtop opening/closing switch 5 Storage compartment 266 Telephone* compartment 29 At a glance Overhead control panel Item 30 Page 1 Interior lighting on/off 117 2 Interior lighting automatic control switch 119 3 Right reading lamp on/off 117 4 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 273 5 Garage door opener* 281 6 Sensor for auto-dimming mirrors* 174 7 Interior rear view mirror 45, 173 8 Left reading lamp on/off 119 At a glance Door control panel 왔 Door control panel Item 1 Door handle Page 97 2 Power window switch for opening/closing passenger-side window 246 3 Power window switch for opening/closing driver’s side window 246 31 32 Getting started Unlocking Adjusting Driving Parking and locking 33 Getting started Unlocking The “Getting started” section provides an overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners should pay special attention to the information given here. Unlocking with the SmartKey Press unlock button Œ on the SmartKey. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here, the “Controls in detail” section (컄 page 91) will provide you with further information. The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment. 왘 SmartKey with remote control 1 ‹ Lock button 2 Š Unlock button for trunk lid 3 Œ Unlock button 4  Panic button (컄 page 80) 34 왘 Get in the vehicle and insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. Getting started Unlocking i ! i Opening a door causes the windows on that side of the car to open slightly. They will return to the up position when the door is closed. The side windows will not open or close if the battery is discharged or the windows are covered with ice. As a result, you may no longer be able to properly close the door. Do not attempt to force the door shut. Doing so may damage the door or the side window. Correct the condition that prevents the windows from operating before attempting to close the door. Without the antenna on the left rear side of the vehicle installed, the SmartKey signaling range is considerably reduced. Hold the SmartKey in close proximity towards the antenna base when locking or unlocking the vehicle. For more information, see “Locking and unlocking” (컄 page 92). 35 Getting started Unlocking Starter switch positions Warning! SmartKey G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Starter switch 0 For removing the SmartKey The steering is locked when the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch. 1 Power supply for some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment. 36 2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical consumers) and driving position. All lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving, refer to see “Lamps in instrument cluster” (컄 page 362). 3 Starting position. Getting started Unlocking i ! When you switch on ignition, the indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. The indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated) will go out when the engine is running. This indicates that the respective systems are operational. If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the starter switch, the vehicle battery may not be sufficiently charged. 앫 Check the vehicle battery and charge it if necessary (컄 page 421). 앫 Get a jump start (컄 page 424). To prevent accelerated vehicle battery discharge or a completely discharged vehicle battery, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch when the engine is not in operation. i Vehicles with automatic transmission*: The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P. For information on starting the engine, see (컄 page 50). 37 Getting started Adjusting Warning! G All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before the vehicle is put into motion. Seats The seats can be adjusted either manually or electrically, depending on the vehicle’s equipment. For more information, see “Seats” (컄 page 104). Warning! G G Do not adjust the driver seat while driving. Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat back in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat back and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body. Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 47). Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch, the power seats* can be operated when the respective door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Never place hands under the seat or near moving parts while the seat is being adjusted. 38 Warning! Getting started Adjusting Warning! G Children 12 years old and under must never ride in this vehicle, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result. Infants and small children must be seated in an appropriate BabySmartTM compatible infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. ! Seat fore and aft adjustment When moving the seats, make sure there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats. 왘 Pull handle 1. 왘 Slide the seat to the desired position. Adjust seat to a comfortable seating position that allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far rearward as possible, consistent with ability to properly operate controls. Manual seat adjustment 왘 Allow handle 1 to reengage with an audible click. 왘 Check for proper engagement before driving. 1 Seat fore and aft adjustment 2 Seat height 3 Backrest tilt 39 Getting started Adjusting Seat height Power seat* adjustment i 왘 The seat adjustment switches are located on the outer side of each seat. The memory function* (컄 page 107) lets you store the settings for power seats*, steering wheel adjustment (electrical)*, and exterior rear view mirrors. Pull or push handle 2 up or down and adjust the seat height until your legs are slightly supported. Backrest tilt 왘 왘 Pull handle 3 and adjust the backrest until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel. Seat fore and aft adjustment 왘 Release handle 3 when the desired backrest tilt is reached. When you hear an audible click, the backrest is again fixed into place. For more information, see “Seats” (컄 page 104). Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). or 왘 40 Adjust seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far rearward as possible, consistent with ability to properly operate controls. 1 Seat fore and aft adjustment 2 Seat height 3 Backrest tilt 4 Seat cushion tilt 왘 Seat height 왘 Open the respective door. Press the horizontal switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 1. Press the horizontal switch up or down in direction of arrow 2 and adjust the seat height until your legs are slightly supported. Getting started Adjusting Backrest tilt 왘 Press the vertical switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 3 until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel. Seat cushion tilt 왘 Press the horizontal switch up or down in direction of arrow 4 until your upper legs are lightly supported. Head restraint height Warning! G For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Adjust head restraint so that the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. Head restraint 왘 Adjust the height of head restraints manually by pulling them upwards or pushing them downwards. i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible. 41 Getting started Adjusting Steering wheel Warning! Steering wheel adjustment, manual G Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch, the electrical steering wheel adjustment feature* can be operated when the driver’s door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 42 Make sure the steering column is securely locked by trying to move the steering wheel up and down, in and out before driving off. ! Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or driving without the steering wheel adjustment feature locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. 왘 Do not drive the vehicle until you have properly locked the steering column. Warning! 1 Adjustment handle 왘 To unlock the steering column, pull handle 1 out to its stop limit. 왘 Move the steering wheel to the desired position. 왘 Push handle 1 back to its original position to relock the steering column. When you hear an audible click, the steering column is again fixed into place. G Only adjust the steering wheel with the vehicle at a standstill and make sure the steering column is securely locked in place before driving off. Driving without the steering column locked may cause an unexpected steering wheel movement which could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Make sure the steering column is securely locked by trying to move it up and down, and in and out before driving off. Getting started Adjusting Steering wheel adjustment, electrical* i Easy-entry/exit feature* The lever for the electrical steering wheel adjustment is located on the steering column (lower left). The memory function* (컄 page 107) lets you store the settings for the steering wheel together with the settings for the exterior rear view mirrors and the driver’s seat position. This feature allows for easier entry into and exit from the vehicle. Adjusting steering column in or out 왘 1 Adjusting steering column, in or out 2 Adjusting steering column, up or down 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). or 왘 Open the driver’s door. The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated or deactivated in the Convenience submenu of the control system (컄 page 147). Move the lever in direction of arrows 1 until a comfortable steering wheel position is reached with your arms slightly bent at the elbow. Adjusting steering column up or down 왘 Move the lever in direction of arrows 2. Make sure your legs can move freely and all the displays (including malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible. 43 Getting started Adjusting Warning! G You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. To cancel steering wheel movement, do one of the following: 앫 Move steering column lever* (컄 page 43). 앫 Press one of the memory position buttons* or the memory button M* (컄 page 107). Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver’s door and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 44 With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel will return to its last set position when you: 앫 앫 close the driver’s door with the ignition switched on, or 앫 With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel tilts upwards when you: remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, or 앫 insert the SmartKey into the starter switch with the driver’s door closed. open the driver’s door with the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1. i i The last set steering wheel position is stored when If the current position for the steering wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering wheel will no longer be able to move upward when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. 앫 the ignition is switched off 앫 the position is stored in memory (컄 page 107) The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted when the engine is started. Getting started Adjusting Warning! G Let the system complete the adjustment procedure before setting the vehicle in motion. All steering wheel adjustment must be completed before setting the vehicle in motion. Driving off with the steering wheel still adjusting could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Interior rear view mirror Mirrors Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic conditions. Warning! G In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks. Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. 왘 Adjust the interior rear view mirror manually. For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” (컄 page 173). Exterior rear view mirrors Warning! G Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. ! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water. 45 Getting started Adjusting ! i i If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) or rearward (hit from the front), reposition it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into place. The exterior rear view mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror normally. The memory function (컄 page 107) lets you store the settings for the exterior rear view mirrors together with the settings for the steering wheel and the driver’s seat position. At low ambient temperatures, the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). 왘 Press switch 1 or 3 to select the respective exterior rear view mirror. The switches are located on the lower part of the center console. The indicator lamp in the respective switch comes on. If you do not adjust the selected exterior rear view mirror by pressing adjustment switch 2, the indicator lamp in the switch will switch off automatically after approximately 10 seconds. 왘 1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror 2 Adjustment switch 3 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror 46 Press adjustment switch 2 forward, rearward, left, or right according to the desired setting. ! Before driving the vehicle through an automatic car wash, fold the exterior mirrors in. Otherwise they may get damaged. For more information, see “Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position (parking aid)” (컄 page 108). Getting started Driving 왔 Driving Warning! G Do not lay any objects in the driver’s footwell. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in the driver’s footwell have sufficient clearance for the pedals. During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate. Fastening the seat belts Warning! G Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained, even pregnant women. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt. The air bags can only provide the protection they were designed to afford if the occupants are using their seat belts (컄 page 64). Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passenger should always wear seat belts. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. 47 Getting started Driving Warning! G Warning! G Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result. Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Infants and small children must be seated in an appropriate BabySmartTM compatible infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body. 48 Warning! G Warning! G Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the “Safety and Security” section (컄 page 68) and (컄 page 71). Getting started Driving 1 Loop for seat belt guidance 2 Latch plate 3 Release button 4 Buckle 왘 With a smooth motion, pull the belt from the belt outlet. 왘 Place the shoulder portion of the belt across the top of your shoulder and the lap portion across your hips. Proper use of seat belts 앫 Do not twist the seat belt when fastening. 앫 Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder (it should not touch the neck). Never pass the shoulder portion of the belt under your arm. 왘 Push latch plate 2 into buckle 4 until it engages. 왘 If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up. 앫 For more information, see “Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning device and air bag” (컄 page 68). Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips (over hip joint) and not across the abdomen. 앫 Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position. 49 Getting started Driving 앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. 앫 Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same time. 앫 When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. 앫 Check your seat belt during travel to make sure it is properly positioned. 앫 Make sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly. Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing. 50 Warning! G Starting the engine G Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They could tear. Warning! Do not allow the belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. This could damage the belt. Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death. Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts. Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash, they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open. Getting started Driving Manual transmission Starting 왘 Depress brake pedal. 왘 Make sure the gearshift lever is in neutral position (no gear selected). 왘 Fully depress clutch pedal. Automatic transmission* Otherwise the engine cannot be started due to the integrated safety interlock. Gearshift pattern for manual transmission For more information, see “Manual transmission” (컄 page 155). 왘 Do not depress accelerator. 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 (컄 page 36) and hold until the engine starts. For information on turning off the engine, see “Turning off engine” (컄 page 61). Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission P Park position with gear selector lever lock R Reverse gear N Neutral position D Drive position For more information, see “Automatic transmission*” (컄 page 157). 51 Getting started Driving Starting Starting difficulties 왘 Place the gear selector lever in position P. If the engine does not start as described, carry out the following steps: 왘 Do not depress accelerator. 왘 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 (컄 page 36) and release it again immediately. The engine starts automatically. For information on turning off the engine, see “Turning off engine” (컄 page 61). Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the vehicle battery. 왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 424). If the engine does not start after several starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system. 왘 52 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and repeat the starting procedure. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Parking brake Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury. Getting started Driving Driving Warning! ! G On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. 1 Parking brake lever 2 Release button 왘 Pull up slightly on parking brake lever 1 and press release button 2. 왘 Push parking brake lever 1 down to its original position. The brake warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) in the speedometer dial goes out. ! If you hear a warning signal and the message Release parking brake appears in the multifunction display when driving off, you have forgotten to release the parking brake. Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear. i Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages and the locking knobs drop down. For more information, see “Automatic central locking” (컄 page 101). 53 Getting started Driving Manual transmission Automatic transmission* 왘 Depress the brake pedal. ! 왘 Fully depress the clutch pedal. 왘 Move gearshift lever to first gear to drive forward, or to reverse gear to drive rearward. Wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion. 왘 Simultaneously release the brake pedal and slowly the clutch pedal. 왘 Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. 왘 Depress the brake pedal. 왘 Move gear selector lever to position D to drive forward, or to position R to drive rearward. 왘 Release the brake pedal. 왘 Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. i During the brief warm-up, transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature. 54 Warning! G Vehicles with automatic transmission*: It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Getting started Driving Switching on headlamps High beam Low beam headlamps The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column. Turn signals The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column. The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel. Combination switch Exterior lamp switch 1 Off 2 Low beam headlamps on 왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to position B. 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher 왘 Combination switch 1 Turn signals, right 2 Turn signals, left Push combination switch in direction of arrow 1. The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster comes on (컄 page 24). For more information on headlamps, see “Lighting” (컄 page 110). 55 Getting started Driving 왘 Press combination switch in direction of arrow 1 or 2. The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp K or L in the instrument cluster flashes (컄 page 24). Windshield wipers ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on a windshield might scratch the glass and/or damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid (컄 page 57). The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column. The combination switch resets automatically after major directional changes. i To signal minor directional changes, press combination switch only to point of resistance and release. The corresponding turn signals will flash three times. Switching on windshield wipers Combination switch 1 Single wipe Wiping with windshield washer fluid 2 Switching on windshield wipers 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). 왘 Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain. 0 Windshield wipers off I Intermittent wiping II Normal wiper speed III Fast wiper speed 56 Getting started Driving Intermittent wiping ! Vehicles with rain sensor*: Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning. Windshield wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on the windshield, and windshield wipers may be damaged as a result. Vehicles with rain sensor*: Intermittent wiping interval is dependent on wetness of windshield. 왘 Turn the combination switch to position I. Vehicles with rain sensor*: After the initial wipe, pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by the rain sensor. i Single wipe Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the vehicle is at a standstill and a door is opened. This helps to avoid people being sprayed with water from wiper action when getting into and out of the vehicle. 왘 Intermittent wiping will be continued when Wiping with windshield washer fluid 앫 all doors are closed and 앫 앫 The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid. 왘 Press the combination switch in direction of arrow 1 past the resistance point. the clutch pedal is depressed (vehicles with manual transmission) The windshield wipers operate with washer fluid. or i the gear selector lever is in position D or R (vehicles with automatic transmission*) To prevent smears on the windshield, wipe with windshield washer fluid every now and then even when it is raining. or 앫 Press the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 1 to the resistance point. the wiper setting is changed using the combination switch For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*” (컄 page 315). 57 Getting started Driving Problems while driving ! If anything blocks the windshield wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediately. 앫 For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn off the engine and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch before attempting to remove any blockage. In case of accident If the vehicle is leaking gasoline: The engine runs erratically and misfires 왘 Do not start the engine under any circumstances. The engine electronics may not be operating properly. 왘 Notify local fire and/or police authorities. 앫 Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it. If the extent of the damage cannot be determined: 앫 An ignition cable may be damaged. 앫 앫 Remove blockage. 왘 Give very little gas. 왘 앫 Turn the windshield wipers on again. 왘 Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. If no damage can be determined on the If the windshield wipers fail to function at all with combination switch in position I, 앫 set combination switch to the next higher wiper speed 앫 have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center 58 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 앫 Major assemblies The coolant temperature is above 248°F (120°C) 앫 Fuel system 앫 Engine mount The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine. 왘 Start the engine in the usual manner. 왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and turn off the engine. Allow engine and coolant to cool. 왘 Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary (컄 page 313). Getting started Parking and locking 왔 Parking and locking You have now completed your first drive. You have properly stopped and parked your vehicle. End your drive as follows. Warning! G Vehicles with manual transmission: Wait until the vehicle is stationary before removing the SmartKey from the starter switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when the SmartKey is removed. Warning! G With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering system. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Warning! G Parking brake Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always: 앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal. 앫 Pull up the parking brake lever firmly. 앫 Move the gear selector lever* to position P (manual transmission: first or reverse gear). 앫 Slowly release brake pedal. 앫 When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb. 앫 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. 앫 Take the SmartKey and lock vehicle when leaving. 1 Parking brake lever 2 Release button 왘 Pull up parking brake lever 1 firmly. When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running, the brake warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) in the speedometer dial comes on. 59 Getting started Parking and locking Warning! G Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever* not fully engaged in position P (manual transmission: first or reverse gear) is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline, position P (manual transmission: first or reverse gear) alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects. Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P (manual transmission: first or reverse gear). When parked on an incline, turn the front wheels towards the road curb. 60 Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake and/or move the gear selector lever* from position P (manual transmission: into Neutral), either of which could result in an accident and/or serious injury. Switching off headlamps 왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to M (컄 page 55). For more information, see “Lighting” (컄 page 110). Getting started Parking and locking Turning off engine 왘 Manual transmission: Move the gearshift lever into first or reverse gear. 왘 Automatic transmission*: Place the gear selector lever in position P. i Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting into first or reverse gear (automatic transmission*: gear selector lever in position P). On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the road curb. 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. The immobilizer is activated. i ! Vehicles with automatic transmission*: The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P. Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get caught or pinched in the door or in the seat mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or cause damage to the door and/or door trim panel. Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 왘 Press the seat belt release button (컄 page 49). 왘 Guide the latch plate to allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt. Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. i With the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds if the parking lamps or low beam headlamps are switched on (컄 page 110). The message Turn off lights appears in the multifunction display. 61 Getting started Parking and locking i Opening a door causes the windows on that side of the car to open slightly. They will return to the up position when the door is closed. ! The side windows will not open or close if the battery is discharged or the windows are covered with ice. As a result, you may no longer be able to properly close the door. Do not attempt to force the door shut. Doing so may damage the door or the side window. Correct the condition that prevents the windows from operating before attempting to close the door. 62 Locking Warning! G To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are around. Before closing doors, make sure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing. Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 왘 Exit the vehicle and close all doors. 왘 Press the lock button ‹ on the SmartKey (컄 page 34). With the trunk and all doors closed, all turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs on the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed now (컄 page 87). i Without the antenna on the left rear side of the vehicle installed, the SmartKey signaling range is considerably reduced. Hold the SmartKey in close proximity towards the antenna base when locking or unlocking the vehicle. For more information, see “Locking and unlocking” (컄 page 92). Safety and Security Occupant safety Panic alarm Driving safety systems Anti-theft systems 63 Safety and Security Occupant safety In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems of the vehicle. The 1 indicator lamp in the speedometer dial (컄 page 24) comes on 앫 The restraint systems are for about 4 seconds when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1. It then goes out briefly, comes on again and remains lit until you start the engine. 앫 Seat belts 앫 Emergency tensioning device (ETD) 앫 Air bags 앫 Child seats for about 4 seconds when you start the engine by turning the SmartKey. 앫 Child seat recognition i As independent systems, their protective effects work in conjunction with each other. i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle” (컄 page 75). 64 앫 The 1 indicator lamp remains lit if the SmartKey is turned to position 2 and left there. The indicator lamp will go out when you start the engine. The 1 indicator lamp goes out shortly after you start the engine. This shows that the restraint systems are operational. A malfunction in the system has been detected if the 1 indicator lamp 앫 fails to extinguish after approximately 4 seconds with the SmartKey in the starter switch position 1 앫 does not come on at all 앫 comes on after the engine was started 앫 comes on while driving For safety reasons, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked. For more information, see “Practical hints” (컄 page 366). Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G In the event that the 1 indicator lamp comes on during driving or does not come on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a malfunction. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury. In addition, improper work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Air bags Warning! Warning! G Air bags are designed to reduce the potential of injury in certain frontal impacts (front air bags, kneebags), or side impacts (head-thorax air bags) which may cause significant injuries. However, no system available today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities. The activation of the air bags temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the air bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door. G To reduce the risk of injury when the front air bags inflate, it is very important for the driver and passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear their seat belts. For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and ensure it is properly positioned on your body. Since the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the air bag can be seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye: 앫 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat 컄컄 backrest. 65 Safety and Security Occupant safety 컄컄 앫 Adjust the driver seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least ten inches (25 cm) or more. You should be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and the steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 앫 Do not lean with your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard. 앫 Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury when driver front air bag inflates. 앫 Adjust the passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied. 66 앫 앫 Occupants, especially children, should never lean their heads in the area of the door where the head-thorax air bag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the air bag be triggered. Always sit nearly upright, properly use the seat belts and appropriately sized infant or child restraint system. Children 12 years old and under must never ride in this vehicle, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise, they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result. Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants. If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator’s Manual. Safety and Security Occupant safety G To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow these guidelines: Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat. Should you choose to place a child 12 years old or under in the passenger seat of your vehicle, you must properly use a BabySmartTM child restraint which will turn off the passenger front air bag. BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off any head-thorax air bag. (1) Occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the head-thorax air bag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the head-thorax air bag be activated. Warning! It should be noted, however, that there is a possibility of a head-thorax air bag related injury if occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a head-thorax air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job. (2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or child restraint system for all children 12 years old or under. (3) Always wear seat belts properly. If you believe that, even with the use of these guidelines, it would be safer for your passenger seat occupants to have the passenger head-thorax air bag deactivated, then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written request to do so at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional cost. Please contact your local authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) for details. 67 Safety and Security Occupant safety i Air bags are designed to activate only in certain frontal impacts (front air bags, kneebags), or side impacts (head-thorax air bags) which exceed preset thresholds. Only during these types of impacts, if of sufficient severity to meet the deployment thresholds, will they provide their supplemental protection. The driver and passenger should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for the air bags to provide their supplemental protection. In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts, roll-overs, other side impacts, rear collisions, or other accidents, the air bags will not be activated. The driver and the passenger will then be protected by the fastened seat belts. 68 We caution you not to rely on the presence of the air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt. Your vehicle was originally equipped with air bags that are designed to activate in certain impacts exceeding a preset threshold to reduce the potential and severity of injury. It is important to your safety and that of your passengers that you replace deployed air bags and repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants. Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning device and air bag Warning! G 앫 Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Only use belts installed or supplied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 앫 Air bags and emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD that was activated must be replaced. 앫 No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the SRS, the installation of additional trim material, badges etc. over the steering wheel hub, passenger air bag cover, outboard sides of the seat backrests, door trim panels, or door frame trims, Safety and Security Occupant safety and installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring. Keep area between air bags and occupants free from objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.). 앫 앫 Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They could tear. 앫 앫 Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts. 앫 Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. 앫 Never place your feet on the instrument panel, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat. 앫 Air bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated. Do not touch. 앫 In addition, improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For your protection and the protection of others, when scrapping the air bag unit or emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Given the considerable deployment speed and the textile structure of the air bags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other injuries resulting from air bag deployment. Warning! G Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of the head-thorax airbags. Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability. When you sell your vehicle, we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator’s Manual. 69 Safety and Security Occupant safety Front air bags 1 Driver’s air bag 2 Passenger air bag 3 Kneebag (passenger side) 4 Kneebag (driver’s side) 70 Driver and passenger air bags are deployed 앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts 앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold 앫 independently of the head-thorax air bags The air bags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts. The passenger air bag will only be deployed if 앫 the passenger seat is occupied 앫 the 75 indicator lamp in the center console is not lit (컄 page 77) 앫 the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold ! Do not place objects heavier than 20 lbs (9 kg) on the passenger seat. This could cause the front air bag or head-thorax air bag on the passenger side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system’s deployment threshold. Kneebags The driver-side kneebag is located on the driver’s side lower instrument panel. The passenger-side kneebag is located on the passenger side below the glove box. They are designed to operate together with the air bags in certain frontal impacts exceeding a preset threshold. The kneebags operate best in conjunction with properly positioned and fastened seat belts. Safety and Security Occupant safety Head-thorax air bags Seat belts When the engine is started, the seat belt telltale < illuminates for a maximum of 6 seconds and a warning chime sounds to remind you and your passenger to fasten your seat belt. If after these 6 seconds, the driver’s or the passenger’s seat belt (with the passenger seat occupied) are not fastened with all doors closed, 1 Head-thorax air bag The head-thorax air bags are deployed 앫 on the impacted side of the vehicle 앫 in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold 앫 independently of the front air bags The passenger-side head-thorax air bag will only deploy if the system senses that the passenger seat is occupied. The head-thorax air bags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold. 앫 and the vehicle speed does not exceed 15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale < remains illuminated for as long as either the driver’s or passenger’s seat belt is not fastened. 앫 and the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale < starts flashing and a warning chime sounds with increasing intensity until both the driver’s and passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or for a maximum of 60 seconds from the time the vehicle speed exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) if either the driver’s or passenger’s seat belt remains unfastened. If the driver’s or passenger’s seat belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds, the seat belt telltale < stops flashing and the warning chime stops sounding. The seat belt telltale < then continues to be illuminated for as long as either the driver’s or passenger’s seat belt are not fastened. The seat belt telltale < will only go out if both the driver’s and passenger’s seat belt (with the passenger seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a door is opened. 71 Safety and Security Occupant safety Always wear your seat belt. All vehicle occupants always need to have their seat belts fastened and wear them properly. In addition, applicable motor vehicle safety laws require you to wear seat belts. Even where this is not the case, we strongly recommend that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened and wear them properly. For more information, see “Fastening the seat belts” (컄 page 47). i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle” (컄 page 75). Warning! G Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure your passenger is properly restrained, even pregnant women. Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passenger should always wear seat belts. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts. 72 Warning! G Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body. Warning! G Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Warning! Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 앫 Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen. USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY 앫 Seat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident. 앫 Each occupant should wear his or her seat belt at all times, because seat belts help reduce the likelihood and potential severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes SRS (driver air bag, passenger air bag, kneebags, head-thorax air bags) and ETD (seat belt emergency tensioning device). 앫 Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these might cause injuries. 앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash. The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front air bags, kneebags, and EDT) and side (head-thorax air bags and EDT) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds. 앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another per컄컄 son or other objects. Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Do not make any modifications to the seat belts. This can lead to unintended activation of the ETDs or to failure. G 73 Safety and Security Occupant safety 컄컄 앫 앫 앫 Belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to manage impact forces. The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries. Pregnant women should also use a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen. Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat. Emergency tensioning device (ETD), seat belt force limiter The seat belts are equipped with emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) and seat belt force limiters. The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases: 앫 앫 in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding a preset severity level. if the restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly, see 1 indicator lamp (컄 page 64). i The ETDs for the seats will only activate if the respective seat belt is fastened (latch plate properly inserted into buckle). 74 In an impact emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body. Belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash. Warning! G An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that was activated must be replaced. When scrapping the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Safety and Security Occupant safety ! Do not place objects heavier than 20 lbs (9 kg) on the passenger seat. This could cause the front air bag or head-thorax air bag on the passenger side and, with the seat belt fastened to secure the object, the ETD to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system’s deployment threshold. Children in the vehicle Infant and child restraint systems If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle: Use only a BabySmartTM compatible child restraint for the passenger seat in this vehicle. 앫 Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child. 앫 Ensure the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion. Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Center. We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The passenger lap-shoulder belt has a special seat belt retractor for secure fastening of child restraints. To fasten a child restraint, follow child restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. Push down on child restraint to take up any slack. To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely. The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner. 75 Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated. ! The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured by a lap-shoulder belt that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2. 76 A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint. When using any infant or child restraint system, be sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant or child restraints. Warning! G Children 12 years old and under must never ride in this vehicle, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury can result. Infants and small children must be seated in an appropriate BabySmartTM compatible infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant. During an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt. Safety and Security Occupant safety Children too big for child restraint systems should use regular seat belts. Position the shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident. BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system Special BabySmartTM compatible child seats, designed for use with the Mercedes-Benz system and available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are required for use with the BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system. With the special child seat properly installed, the passenger front air bag will not deploy. The 75 indicator lamp will be illuminated, except with the SmartKey removed or in starter switch position 0. 1 75 indicator lamp i The system does not deactivate the head-thorax air bag and the ETD (emergency tensioning device). Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; even if the children are secured in a child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause serious personal injury. 77 Safety and Security Occupant safety Self-test BabySmartTM without special child seat installed Warning! After turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2, the 75 indicator lamp comes on for approximately 6 seconds and then goes out. The BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child seat designed to operate with it. It will not work with child seats which are not BabySmartTM compatible. When using a BabySmartTM compatible child seat on the passenger seat, the front passenger air bag will not deploy only if the 75 indicator lamp remains illuminated. Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the deactivation system. The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident, instead of protecting the child. Please be sure to check the 75 indicator lamp every time you use the special system child seat. Should the 75 indicator lamp go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. If the 75 indicator lamp remains out, do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the passenger seat until the system has been repaired. If the 75 indicator lamp should not come on or is continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any child on the passenger seat. For more information, see “Practical hints” (컄 page 367). G Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation of special child seats. 78 Warning! G Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G Do not place powered-on laptops, cell phones, electronic tags such as those used in ski passes, and like electronic devices on the passenger seat. Signals from such devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM system. Such signal interference, for example, may cause the 75 indicator lamp not to come on during self-test or be continuously lit, indicating that the system is not functioning. 79 Safety and Security Panic alarm An audible alarm and flashing exterior lamps will operate for approximately 21/2 minutes. 1  button 80 i i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Safety and Security Panic alarm Activating Deactivating 왘 Press and hold button 1 for at least 1 second. 왘 i 왘 Without the antenna on the left rear side of the vehicle installed, the SmartKey signaling range for the panic alarm is considerably reduced. The panic alarm then only functions if the SmartKey is held in close proximity towards the antenna base. Press button 1 again. or Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. 81 Safety and Security Driving safety systems In this section you will find information on the following driving safety systems: 앫 ABS (Antilock Brake System) 앫 앫 Warning! G ABS G Warning! BAS (Brake Assist System) The following factors increase the risk of accidents: ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) 앫 Excessive speed, especially in turns 앫 Wet and slippery road surfaces 앫 Following another vehicle too closely Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness. i In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, and the ESP® is only achieved with winter tires (컄 page 348), or snow chains as required. The ABS, BAS, and ESP® cannot reduce this risk. Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking. This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle. The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions. On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even to light brake pressure. The - indicator lamp in the speedometer dial (컄 page 24) comes on when you switch on the ignition. It goes out when the engine is running. 82 Safety and Security Driving safety systems Braking Emergency brake maneuver At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode. 왘 왘 Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation. Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS, namely braking power and the ability to steer the vehicle. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. BAS Keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal. Warning! G The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in emergency situations. If you apply the brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing braking distance. Apply continuous full braking pressure until the emergency braking situation is over. The ABS will prevent the wheels from locking. When you release the brake pedal, the brakes function again as normal. The BAS is then deactivated. Warning! G If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake system is still functioning normally, but without the additional brake boost available that BAS would normally provide in an emergency braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance may increase. For more information, see “Practical Hints” (컄 page 362). 83 Safety and Security Driving safety systems Warning! G The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. ESP® Warning! The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is operational as soon as the engine is running and monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface) and handling. The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting engine output, the ESP® works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP® also stabilizes the vehicle during braking maneuvers. The ESP® warning lamp v in the speedometer dial flashes when the ESP® is engaged. The ESP® warning lamp v in the speedometer dial comes on when you switch on the ignition. It goes out when the engine is running. 84 G Never switch off the ESP® when you see the ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the speedometer dial. In this case, proceed as follows: 앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle as possible. 앫 While driving, ease up on the accelerator. 앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions. Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP® cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed. Safety and Security Driving safety systems Warning! G The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded. The ESP® cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP® equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. i The ESP® will only function properly if you use wheels of the recommended tire size (컄 page 439). Switching off the ESP® ! Because of the ESP®’s automatic operation, the engine must be turned off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1) when 앫 the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer 앫 the vehicle is being towed with the front axle raised Active braking action through the ESP may otherwise seriously damage the brake system. Warning! The ESP® should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers. Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare wheel with collapsible tire is mounted. ® For more information, see “Practical Hints” (컄 page 365). G To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off the ESP® in driving situations where it would be advantageous to have the drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as: 앫 when driving with snow chains 앫 in deep snow 앫 in sand or gravel 85 Safety and Security Driving safety systems ! ® Turn on the ESP immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore. The switch is located on the upper part of the center console. the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle 앫 the engine output is not limited, which allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut into surfaces for a better grip 앫 the traction control will still brake a spinning wheel 앫 the ESP® continues to operate when you are braking i When the ESP® is switched off and one or more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP® warning lamp v in the speedometer dial flashes. However, the ESP® will then not stabilize the vehicle. G When the ESP® warning lamp v is illuminated continuously, the ESP® is switched off. When you switch off the ESP® 앫 Warning! Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating status of the ESP®. ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period with the ESP® switched off. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 1 ESP® switch (off/on) 왘 With the engine running, press ESP® switch 1. The ESP® warning lamp v in the speedometer dial comes on. The ESP® is switched off. Switching on the ESP® 왘 Press ESP® switch 1. The ESP® warning lamp v in the speedometer dial goes out. You are now again in normal driving mode with the ESP® switched on. 86 Safety and Security Anti-theft systems 왔 Anti-theft systems Immobilizer Anti-theft alarm system The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle. Once the alarm system has been armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone opens Activating 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. The alarm will stay on, even if the activating element (e.g. a door) is immediately closed. 앫 a door i 앫 the trunk lid If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system (컄 page 273), provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available (컄 page 273). 앫 the hood Deactivating 앫 the glove box 왘 앫 the storage compartment in the center console Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). i i Starting the engine will also deactivate the immobilizer. The alarm system will also be triggered when In case the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). 앫 someone attempts to raise the vehicle 앫 opening the vehicle with the mechanical key 앫 someone opens a door from the inside 앫 someone opens the trunk lid with the emergency release button 87 Safety and Security Anti-theft systems Arming the alarm system Disarming the alarm system 왘 왘 Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey. The turn signal lamps flash three times to indicate that the alarm system is activated. The indicator lamp in the central locking switch starts flashing (컄 page 102). The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is disarmed. Canceling the alarm To cancel the alarm: i 왘 If the turn signal lamps do not flash three times, one of the following elements may not be properly closed: or 앫 a door 왘 앫 the trunk lid 앫 the fuel filler flap 앫 the glove box 앫 the storage compartment under the armrest Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again. 88 Unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey. Press the Œ or ‹ button on the SmartKey. Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. Tow-away alarm Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual and audible alarm will be triggered when someone attempts to raise the vehicle. i The tow-away protection alarm is triggered, for example, if the vehicle is lifted on one side. If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system (컄 page 273), provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available (컄 page 273). Safety and Security Anti-theft systems Arming tow-away alarm 왘 Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey. The switch is located on the lower part of the center console. 왘 Indicator lamp 1 in the tow-away alarm deactivation switch comes on briefly. The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after about 30 seconds. i When you unlock your vehicle, the tow-away protection disarms automatically. The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you lock the vehicle again. Disarming tow-away alarm To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm, switch off the tow-away alarm feature before towing the vehicle, or when parking on a surface subject to movement, such as a ferry or auto train. Press tow-away alarm deactivation switch 2. 왘 Exit your vehicle. 왘 Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey. The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you lock your vehicle again. 1 Indicator lamp 2 Tow-away alarm deactivation switch Canceling tow-away alarm To cancel the alarm: 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 36). 왘 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. or i You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm while the ignition is switched on. 왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the SmartKey. Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. 89 90 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Seats Memory function* Lighting Instrument cluster Control system Manual transmission Automatic transmission* Good visibility Climate control Automatic climate control* Audio system Power windows Retractable hardtop Driving systems Useful features 91 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking In the “Controls in detail” section you will find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed in your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you. To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the “Getting started” section of this manual. The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment. For more information on unlocking and locking, see (컄 page 34) and (컄 page 59). SmartKey Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys, each with remote control and a removable mechanical key. The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys are a different color to help distinguish each SmartKey unit. The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it. The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks: 92 앫 the doors 앫 the trunk lid 앫 the fuel filler flap 앫 the glove box 앫 the storage compartment under the armrest SmartKey with remote control 1 ‹ Lock button 2 Š Unlock button for the trunk lid 3 Mechanical key locking tab 4 Œ Unlock button 5 Battery check lamp 6  Panic button (컄 page 80) Controls in detail Locking and unlocking i i Opening a door causes the windows on that side of the car to open slightly. They will return to the up position when the door is closed. Without the antenna on the left rear side of the vehicle installed, the SmartKey signaling range is considerably reduced. Hold the SmartKey in close proximity towards the antenna base when locking or unlocking the vehicle. ! The side windows will not open or close if the battery is discharged or the windows are covered with ice. As a result, you may no longer be able to properly close the door. Do not attempt to force the door shut. Doing so may damage the door or the side window. Correct the condition that prevents the windows from operating before attempting to close the door. Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury. ! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation. 93 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking i i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. i You can also open and close the retractable hardtop using the SmartKey* (컄 page 257). 94 Factory setting Global unlocking 왘 Press button Œ. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs on the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed (컄 page 87). The vehicle will lock again automatically and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if: 앫 neither door nor trunk is opened 앫 the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter switch 앫 the central locking switch is not activated Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Global locking Selective setting Global unlocking 왘 If you frequently travel alone, you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that pressing button Œ only unlocks the driver’s door, the storage compartment under the armrest, the glove box, and the fuel filler flap. 왘 왘 Global locking Press button ‹. With the trunk and all doors closed, all turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs on the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed now (컄 page 87). i Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about 6 seconds. Battery check lamp 5 flashes twice. If the turn signal lamps do not flash three times, one of the following elements may not be properly closed: The SmartKey will then function as follows: 앫 a door Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler flap 앫 the trunk lid 앫 the fuel filler flap 앫 the glove box 앫 the storage compartment under the armrest 왘 Press button Œ once. Press button Œ twice. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs on the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed (컄 page 87). 왘 Press button ‹. With the trunk and all doors closed, all turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs on the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed now (컄 page 87). All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knob on the driver’s door move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed (컄 page 87). Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again. 95 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Restoring to factory setting ! Unlocking the trunk lid 왘 If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey, then the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is drained. You can unlock and open the trunk lid separately. Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about 6 seconds. Battery check lamp 5 flashes twice. The SmartKey is set to the factory setting again. 앫 Check the batteries in the SmartKey and replace them if necessary (컄 page 398). 앫 Use the mechanical key to lock/unlock the driver’s door (컄 page 394). 앫 Use the mechanical key to lock/unlock the trunk lid as required (컄 page 395). 앫 Have the vehicle battery and the battery connections checked (컄 page 421). If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 96 왘 Press and hold button Š on the SmartKey until the trunk lid unlocks. For opening the trunk, see “Opening the trunk” (컄 page 98). i The trunk lid can only be opened when the vehicle is not in motion and the retractable hardtop is fully opened or closed. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Checking the batteries Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key 왘 If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key, you should do the following: Press button ‹ or Œ. Battery check lamp 5 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order. i If battery check lamp 5 does not come on briefly during check, then the SmartKey batteries are discharged. 앫 Replace the batteries (컄 page 398). You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. i If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly. 왘 Have the SmartKey deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Report the loss of the SmartKey or the mechanical key to your car insurance company immediately. 왘 If necessary have the mechanical lock replaced. Opening the doors from the inside You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to supply you with a replacement. 1 Inside door handle 2 Locking knob 왘 Pull on door handle 1 of the desired door. If the door was locked, locking knob 2 will move up. 컄컄 97 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking 컄컄 i i If the vehicle has previously been centrally locked with the SmartKey, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Opening a door causes the windows on that side of the car to open slightly. They will return to the up position when the door is closed. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following: ! 왘 Pull on the handle. The side windows will not open or close if the battery is discharged or the windows are covered with ice. As a result, you may no longer be able to properly close the door. Do not attempt to force the door shut. Doing so may damage the door or the side window. Correct the condition that prevents the windows from operating before attempting to close the door. 왘 Lift the trunk lid. 앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey. 앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. 98 Opening the trunk A minimum height clearance of 5.78 ft (1.76 m) is required to open the trunk lid. The handle is located above the rear license plate recess. ! When the trunk lid is lifted slightly, it swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking i Closing the trunk Warning! The vehicle or trunk lid must be unlocked before the trunk lid can be opened. To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk lid opening when closing the trunk lid. Be especially careful when small children are around. The trunk lid can only be opened when the vehicle is not in motion and the retractable hardtop is fully opened or closed. The trunk lid can also be opened from its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency release” (컄 page 100). G Warning! 1 Handle 왘 Lower the trunk lid using handle 1. 왘 Close the trunk lid with hands placed flat on the trunk lid. G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury. 99 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Warning! G Only drive with the trunk lid closed as, among other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. i Trunk lid emergency release The emergency release button is located on the inside of the trunk lid. With the emergency release button, the trunk can be opened from inside the trunk. i Do not place the SmartKey in the open trunk. You may lock yourself out. The emergency release button unlocks the trunk while the vehicle is standing still or in motion. Illumination of the emergency release button: 앫 The button flashes for 30 minutes after opening the trunk. 앫 The button flashes for 60 minutes after closing the trunk. i i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the trunk lid will lock automatically when closed. The turn signal lamps will flash three times to confirm locking. The emergency release button does not unlock the trunk if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected. 1 Emergency release button 왘 Briefly press emergency release button 1. The trunk lid unlocks and opens slightly. 왘 100 Push up the trunk lid to fully open. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking i Automatic central locking If the vehicle has previously been centrally locked with the SmartKey, opening the trunk from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following: 앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey. 앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. The doors and the trunk automatically lock when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. i The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold. To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking, deactivate the automatic central locking when the vehicle 앫 is pushed or towed 앫 is on a test stand You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system, see “Setting automatic locking” (컄 page 147). 101 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Locking and unlocking from the inside Warning! You can lock or unlock the doors and the trunk from inside using the central locking switch. This can be useful, for example, if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive. The fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked with the central locking or unlocking switch, respectively. G The switches are located on the upper part of the center console. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 1 Central locking switch 2 Central unlocking switch 102 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking i Locking You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. 왘 If the vehicle was previously centrally locked using the SmartKey, it will not unlock using the central unlocking switch 2. If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch 1 앫 while in the selective remote control mode, only the door opened from inside is unlocked. 앫 while in the global remote control mode, the vehicle is unlocked completely when a door is opened from the inside. Press central locking switch 1. If all doors are closed, the vehicle locks. Unlocking 왘 Press central unlocking switch 2. The vehicle unlocks. 103 Controls in detail Seats For information on seat adjustment, see “Adjusting” (컄 page 38). Red indicator lamps 2 on the seat heating switch show which heating level you have selected: Switching on seat heating 왘 Three red indicator lamps 2 on the respective seat heating switch come on. Seat heating* Level The switches are located on the upper part of the center console. 3 Three indicator lamps on (highest level). After approximately 5 minutes, seat heating is automatically switched to level 2. 2 Two indicator lamps on. After approximately 10 minutes, seat heating is automatically switched to level 1. 1 1 Seat heating switch (driver’s side) 2 Indicator lamps 왘 104 One indicator lamp on (lowest level). After approximately 20 minutes, seat heating is automatically switched to off. off Press the desired seat heating switch. No indicator lamp on. Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). 왘 Press the seat heating switch repeatedly until the desired seat heating level is reached. Controls in detail Seats Switching off seat heating 왘 Press the desired seat heating switch repeatedly until all indicator lamps 2 on the seat heating switch go out. i If one or more of indicator lamps 2 on the seat heating switch are flashing, there is insufficient voltage available since too many electrical consumers are turned on. The seat heating switches off automatically. AIRSCARF neck-level heating* Warning! The AIRSCARF neck-level heating provides the area surrounding the occupants’ necks with a heated air stream flowing from openings in the head restraints. The switches are located on the upper part of the center console. G When switching on the AIRSCARF neck-level heating, the air streaming from the openings may be very hot. When in close proximity to the openings, you could be seriously burned. To help avoid serious personal injuries, switch the AIRSCARF to a lower heating level. The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available. 1 AIRSCARF switch (driver’s side shown) 2 Indicator lamps 105 Controls in detail Seats Red indicator lamps 2 on the AIRSCARF switches show which heating level you have selected: Switching on Switching off 왘 왘 All three indicator lamps on the respective AIRSCARF switch come on. After a preheating time of approximately 7 seconds, the blower starts. Level 3 Three indicator lamps on (highest heating level). 2 Two indicator lamps on. 1 One indicator lamp on (lowest heating level). off No indicator lamp on. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). Press the respective AIRSCARF switch for the desired side. 왘 Press the respective AIRSCARF switch repeatedly until the desired AIRSCARF heating level for the corresponding seat is reached. Press the respective AIRSCARF switch repeatedly until all indicator lamps on the AIRSCARF switch go out. i After switching off the AIRSCARF neck-level heating, the AIRSCARF fan continues to operate for approximately 10 seconds to cool down the heater elements. i If one or more of indicator lamps 2 on the AIRSCARF switch are flashing, there is insufficient voltage available since too many electrical consumers are turned on. The AIRSCARF neck-level heating switches off automatically. The AIRSCARF neck-level heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available. 106 Controls in detail Memory function* 왔 Memory function* Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust the seat height, seat position fore and aft, and seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height. See also the section on air bags for proper seat positioning (컄 page 65). In addition, adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the interior and exterior rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision. Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 255 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2. The following settings are stored when using the buttons on the outer side of the respective seat: The memory button and memory position switch are located on the outer side of each seat. Driver and passenger seat: 앫 Seat and backrest position Driver only: 앫 Steering wheel position 앫 Exterior rear view mirrors Warning! G Do not activate the memory function while driving. Activating the memory function while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. 1 Memory button M 2 Memory position switch 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). or 왘 Open the respective door. 107 Controls in detail Memory function* Storing positions into memory 왘 Recalling positions from memory Adjust the seat, on the driver’s side also the steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors, to the desired positions (컄 page 38). 왘 Press memory button M 1. 왘 Release memory button M 1 and press a memory position switch 2 within 3 seconds. All settings are stored to the selected position. ! Do not operate the power seats using the memory position switches if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined position. Doing so could cause damage to the seats. 왘 Press and hold desired memory position switch 2 until the seat, on the driver’s side also the steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors, have completely moved to the stored positions. i Releasing the memory position switches immediately stops movement to the stored positions. 108 Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position (parking aid) For easier parking, you can adjust the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so that you can see the right rear wheel as soon as you engage reverse gear R. You can switch the parking position feature on and off via the control system (컄 page 148). For information on activating the parking position feature, see “Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position*” (컄 page 175). Controls in detail Memory function* The switches are located on the lower part of the center console. 1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror switch 2 Adjustment switch 3 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror switch 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). 왘 Press switch 3 to select the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. 왘 Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror with adjustment switch 2 so that you see the rear wheel and the road curb. 왘 Press memory button M (컄 page 107). 왘 Within 3 seconds, press adjustment switch 2 forward, backward, left, or right. The parking position is stored if the mirror does not move. i If the mirror does move, repeat the above steps. After the setting is stored, you can move the mirror again. 109 Controls in detail Lighting For information on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals, see “Switching on headlamps” (컄 page 55) and “Turn signals” (컄 page 55). Exterior lamp switch The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel. i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country in which the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams. Relevant information can be obtained at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. M Off Daytime running lamp mode (컄 page 112) U Automatic headlamp mode Daytime running lamp mode (컄 page 112) C Parking lamps (also tail lamps, license plate lamps, side marker lamps, instrument panel lamps) B Low beam headlamps (or high beam headlamps when the combination switch is pushed forward) and parking lamps Exterior lamp switch ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop) ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops) C Indicator lamp for parking lamps ‡ Indicator lamp for front fog lamps † Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp 110 Controls in detail Lighting i With the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds if the parking lamps or low beam headlamps are switched on. The message Turn off lights appears in the multifunction display. Manual headlamp mode The low beam headlamps and the parking lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch. Automatic headlamp mode The following lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light: 앫 Low beam headlamps 앫 Tail and parking lamps 앫 License plate lamps 앫 Side marker lamps Warning! G If the exterior lamp switch is set to U 앫 앫 the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from oncoming traffic. the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions. To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to B when driving or when traffic and/or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so. In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch from position U to B with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. Switching from U to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle's lights at all times. 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U. With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 only the parking lamps will switch on and off automatically. When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps, the tail and parking lamps, the license plate lamps, and the side marker lamps will switch on and off automatically. 111 Controls in detail Lighting Daytime running lamp mode Canada only: USA only: 왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to position M or U. The daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode. When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps are switched on. Vehicles with automatic transmission*: When the engine is running, and you shift from a driving position to position N or P, the low beam headlamps will switch off with a three-minute delay. By default, the daytime running lamp mode is deactivated. Activate the daytime running lamp mode using the control system, see “Setting daytime running lamp mode” (컄 page 143). In low ambient light conditions, the following lamps will switch on additionally: 앫 Tail and parking lamps 앫 License plate lamps 앫 Side marker lamps For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior lamp switch to position B to permit activation of the high beam headlamps. i With the daytime running lamp mode and the exterior lamp switch in position M you cannot switch on the high beam headlamps. The high beam flasher is available at all times. 112 When the engine is running, and you 앫 앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to position C, the parking lamps switch on additionally. turn the exterior lamp switch to position B, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode. The corresponding exterior lamps switch on (컄 page 110). When the engine is running, and you turn the exterior lamp switch to position C or B, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode. The corresponding exterior lamps switch on (컄 page 110). Controls in detail Lighting Locator lighting and night security illumination Fog lamps The locator lighting and the night security illumination are described in the “Control system” section, see (컄 page 144) and (컄 page 145). Warning! i G In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, only switch from position U to B with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. Switching from U to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident. Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding allowable lamp operation. i Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the exterior lamp switch in position U. To switch on the fog lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch to position B first. 113 Controls in detail Lighting Front fog lamps Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only) 왘 왘 Switch on the front fog lamps (컄 page 114). 왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to second stop. Switch on the low beam headlamps (컄 page 110). Combination switch The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column. The rear fog lamp switches on. The yellow indicator lamp † in the exterior lamp switch comes on (컄 page 110). 왘 왘 With the exterior lamp switch in the low beam headlamp position, pull out the exterior lamp switch to first stop. The front fog lamps switch on. The green indicator lamp ‡ in the exterior lamp switch comes on (컄 page 110). 왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch. The front fog lamps switch off. The green indicator lamp ‡ in the exterior lamp switch goes out. 114 Push in the exterior lamp switch to first stop. The rear fog lamp switches off. The yellow indicator lamp † in the exterior lamp switch goes out. The front fog lamps remain lit. 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher Controls in detail Lighting High beam 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to position B or U (컄 page 110). 왘 Push the combination switch in direction of arrow 1 to switch on the high beam. The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster comes on (컄 page 24). 왘 Pull the combination switch in direction of arrow 2 to its original position to switch off the high beam. The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster goes out. Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* (SLK 280, SLK 350: with Bi-Xenon* headlamps and without Sport Package*) i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps improve illumination of the road onto which you are turning. The corner-illuminating front fog lamps function is not available at a vehicle speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will operate with the engine running and with 앫 앫 왘 Pull the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 2. 앫 Driving forward the exterior lamp switch in position B (컄 page 110) Switching on corner-illuminating front fog lamps or 왘 the exterior lamp switch in position U (컄 page 110) or High beam flasher Corner-illuminating front fog lamps will only come on in low ambient lighting conditions. the daytime running lamp mode activated (컄 page 112) Depending on whether you are turning left or right, switch on the left or right turn signal (컄 page 55). The respective front fog lamp comes on and illuminates the road onto which you are turning. 컄컄 115 Controls in detail Lighting 컄컄 i The respective corner-illuminating front fog lamp will stay lit until you switch off the turn signal, even if the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. The respective corner-illuminating front fog lamp may stay on for a brief period after the turn signal is switched off. The respective corner-illuminating front fog lamp stays on for a maximum of 3 minutes. After that period, it will go out even if the turn signal is still on. i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will come on automatically depending on the steering angle, even if you did not switch on either turn signal. If the corner-illuminating front fog lamps came on automatically, they will also go out automatically depending on the steering angle. 116 Switching off corner-illuminating front fog lamps The combination switch for the turn signal resets automatically after major steering wheel movements. This will switch off the corner-illuminating front fog lamps if they where activated by switching on the left or right turn signal. If the turn signal should stay on after making the turn, the turn signal and corner-illuminating front fog lamp can be switched off by returning the combination switch to its original position. Driving rearward Switching on corner-illuminating front fog lamps 왘 Place the gearshift lever (gear selector lever*) in position R. The inverse front fog lamp comes on automatically depending on the steering direction and steering angle. Switching off corner-illuminating front fog lamps 왘 Place the gearshift lever (gear selector lever*) out of position R. The respective front fog lamp goes out. Controls in detail Lighting Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher can be switched on at all times, even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch. Switching on hazard warning flasher 왘 Press hazard warning flasher switch 1. The controls are located in the overhead control panel. All turn signal lamps are flashing. i The hazard warning flasher switches on automatically when an air bag deploys. With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set for either left or right turn, only the respective turn signals will operate when the SmartKey is in the starter switch position 1 or 2. The hazard warning flasher switch is located on the upper part of the center console. Switching off hazard warning flasher 왘 Press hazard warning flasher switch 1 again. i 1 Hazard warning flasher switch Interior lighting If the hazard warning flasher has been activated automatically, press hazard warning flasher switch 1 once to switch it off. 1 Interior lighting on/off 2 Automatic control on/off 3 Right reading lamp on/off 4 Left reading lamp on/off i Leaving an interior light switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the engine turned off could result in a discharged battery. 117 Controls in detail Lighting Automatic control Activating 왘 Press automatic control switch 2 until it is flush to the other switches. The interior lighting switches on in darkness, when you 앫 unlock the vehicle 앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter switch 앫 open a door The interior lighting switches off automatically following a preset time delay. For more information, see “Interior lighting delayed shut-off” (컄 page 146). i If the door remains open, the interior lighting switches off automatically after approximately 5 minutes when the SmartKey is in starter switch position 0 or removed. 118 Deactivating 왘 Press automatic control switch 2 until it engages at a deeper position than the other switches. The interior lighting remains switched off in darkness, even when you 앫 unlock the vehicle 앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter switch 앫 open a door i When you open the trunk, the trunk lighting switches on automatically. If the trunk lid remains open, the trunk lighting switches off automatically after approximately 10 minutes. Manual control Interior lighting 왘 Press interior lighting switch 1. The interior lighting switches on. 왘 Press interior lighting switch 1 again. The interior lighting switches off. i The footwell lighting* is switched on and off simultaneously with the manual control. Controls in detail Lighting Reading lamps Door entry lamps The standard reading lamps are located to the left and right of the overhead control panel. Reading lamps as part of the interior lighting package* are located on the lower edge of the interior rear view mirror. For better orientation in the dark, the corresponding door entry lamps will switch on in darkness when you open a door and the automatic control is activated. 왘 Press reading lamp switch 3 or 4 to switch on the desired reading lamp. The door entry lamps switch off when the corresponding door is closed. 왘 Press reading lamp switch 3 or 4 again to switch off the respective reading lamp. i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and switch off the exterior headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately 5 minutes. 119 Controls in detail Instrument cluster A full view illustration of the instrument cluster can be found in the “At a glance” section (컄 page 24). The multifunction display in the instrument cluster is activated when you 앫 open a door 앫 switch on exterior lighting 앫 switch on ignition (컄 page 36) 앫 press reset button J (컄 page 24) Instrument cluster illumination i Adjusting The instrument cluster illumination automatically adjusts to the ambient light. The knobs for adjusting the instrument cluster illumination are on the left side of the instrument cluster (컄 page 24). You can only adjust the brightness of the instrument cluster illumination when it is dark outside. i With the exterior lighting switched on, the brightness of the switches in the center console will be adjusted when using knob + or -. i Opening a door or pressing the reset button Jwithout switching on the ignition or the exterior lighting activates the multifunction display illumination only for 30 seconds. For information on changing the instrument cluster settings, e.g. the language, see “Instrument cluster submenu” (컄 page 137). Brightening illumination 1 Brightening illumination (knob +) 2 Dimming illumination (knob -) 3 Reset button J 왘 Press knob + briefly. The instrument cluster illumination brightens. Dimming illumination 왘 Press knob - briefly. The instrument cluster illumination dims. 120 Controls in detail Instrument cluster Tachometer The red marking on the tachometer (컄 page 24) denotes excessive engine speed. ! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking. Outside temperature indicator Warning! G The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The outside temperature is displayed in the multifunction display (컄 page 129). The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area. Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving. Therefore, the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next the sensor, not by comparison to external displays, e.g. bank signs, etc. When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your garage), you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed. A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature displays caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driving. 121 Controls in detail Instrument cluster Trip odometer Clock 왘 Make sure you are viewing the standard display menu (컄 page 128). 왘 Press and hold reset button Juntil the trip odometer is reset. Vehicles with COMAND*: The clock in the instrument cluster can be synchronized with the time set in COMAND using the time synchronization with head unit feature (컄 page 139), or set independently from COMAND using the control system (컄 page 139) with the time synchronization with head unit feature set to Off. For setting the time in COMAND, see separate COMAND operating instructions. For setting the time with audio system, (컄 page 139). 122 Controls in detail Control system 왔 Control system The control system is activated as soon as the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 1. The control system enables you to 앫 call up information about your vehicle 앫 change vehicle settings For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next due for service, to set the language for messages in the instrument cluster display, and much more. i The displays for the audio systems (radio, CD player) will appear in English, regardless of the language selected. Warning! G Multifunction display A driver’s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. The control system relays information to the multifunction display. 1 Main odometer 2 Trip odometer 3 Current program mode (automatic transmission* only) 4 Status indicator (outside temperature/digital speedometer) 5 Current gear selector lever position/gear range (automatic transmission* only) 123 Controls in detail Control system Multifunction steering wheel The displays in the multifunction display and the settings in the control system are controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. 1 Multifunction display Operating the control system 2 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume: Press button æ up/to increase ç down/to decrease 3 Telephone*: Press button s to take a call, or to dial a call t to end a call, or to reject an incoming call 4 Moving within a menu: Press button j for next display Pressing any of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is shown in the multifunction display. The information available in the multifunction display are arranged in menus, each containing a number of functions or submenus. The individual functions are then found within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under Audio, for example). These functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your vehicle. It is helpful to think of the menus, and the functions within each menu, as being arranged in a circular pattern. 앫 If you press button è or ÿ repeatedly, you will pass through each menu one after the other. 앫 If you press button j or k repeatedly, you will pass through each function display, one after the other, in the current menu. k for previous display 5 Menu systems: Press button è for next menu ÿ for previous menu 124 Controls in detail Control system In the Settings... menu, you will find a number of submenus instead of functions for calling up and changing settings. For instructions on using these submenus, see “Settings menu” (컄 page 134). The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment is installed in your vehicle. i i The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the control system displays. SLK 55 AMG: The steering wheel in this vehicle will vary from steering wheel shown. However, multifunction steering wheel symbols and feature description apply to AMG vehicles as well. The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system you are in. 125 Controls in detail Control system Menus 126 This is what you will see when you scroll through the menus. The table below provides an overview of the individual menus. Controls in detail Control system Menus, submenus and functions Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Standard display AUDIO NAV* (컄 page 128) Menu 6 Menu 7 Vehicle status Settings message memory1 Trip computer TEL* (컄 page 132) (컄 page 132) (컄 page 134) (컄 page 149) (컄 page 151) Show route guidance instructions, current direction traveled Call up vehicle malfunction, warning and system status messages stored in memory Reset to factory Fuel consumpsettings tion statistics after start Load phone book Instrument clus- Fuel consumpter submenu tion statistics since last reset Search for name in phone book Digital speedome- Operate the CD ter/outside tem- player perature Time/Date submenu Redialing Call up maintenance service indicator Lighting submenu Check engine oil level (SLK 55 AMG only) Vehicle submenu (컄 page 129) Commands/submenus Run Flat Indicator* Select radio station 1 Check coolant temperature Select satellite radio station* (USA only) Menu 5 Call up range Convenience submenu The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored. 127 Controls in detail Control system Standard display menu The following functions are available: Checking coolant temperature The multifunction display shows the main odometer and trip odometer. This default setting is referred to as the standard display. Function Page 왘 Run Flat Indicator* 329 Checking coolant temperature 128 Display digital speedometer or outside temperature 129 Calling up maintenance service indicator 350 Checking engine oil level (SLK 55 AMG only) 309 1 Main odometer 2 Trip odometer If another display is shown instead of the standard display: 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see the standard display. 왘 Press button k or j to select the functions in the standard display menu. 128 When in the standard display menu, press button j or k repeatedly until you see the coolant temperature in the multifunction display. During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C). The engine should not be operated with a coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. i Excessive coolant temperature triggers a warning message in the multifunction display (컄 page 376). Controls in detail Control system Warning! 앫 앫 G Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Displaying digital speedometer or outside temperature 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see the digital speedometer. The current vehicle speed is shown in the multifunction display. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn off the engine, get out of the car and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. AUDIO menu The functions in the AUDIO menu operate the audio equipment which you currently have turned on. If no audio equipment is currently switched on, the message AUDIO off is shown in the multifunction display. The following functions are available: i You can select either the display of the digital speedometer or the outside temperature indicator (컄 page 138). Function Page Selecting radio station 130 Selecting satellite radio station* (USA only) 130 Operating the CD player 131 129 Controls in detail Control system Selecting radio station i 왘 You can only store new stations using the corresponding feature on the radio (컄 page 212). Switch on the radio (컄 page 209). Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to the separate operating instructions. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see the currently tuned station in the multifunction display. 1 Waveband setting 2 Tuned station 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the desired station is found. 130 Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to the separate operating instructions. Selecting satellite radio station* (USA only) The Sirius satellite radio is treated as a radio application. 왘 Select satellite radio with the corresponding soft key (SAT) in the radio menu. 1 SAT mode and preset number 2 Channel name or number 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the desired channel is found. Controls in detail Control system i Operating the CD player For more information on satellite radio operation, see “Introduction to satellite radio* (USA only)” (컄 page 214). 왘 Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to separate operating instructions. Switch on the radio and select the CD player (컄 page 222). Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to the separate operating instructions. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the settings for the CD currently being played are shown in the multifunction display. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the desired track is selected. i To select a CD from the magazine, press a number on the audio system or the COMAND* system key pad located in the center dashboard. 1 Current CD (CD0 for single CD drive in head unit, CD1 through CD6 for CD in CD changer*) 2 Current track 131 Controls in detail Control system NAV* menu The NAV menu contains the functions needed to operate your navigation system. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see the message NAV in the multifunction display. 앫 앫 132 If the COMAND system is switched off, the message NAV off is shown in the multifunction display. With COMAND switched on but route guidance not activated, the direction of travel and, if available, the name of the street currently traveled on appear in the multifunction display. 앫 With COMAND switched on and route guidance activated, the direction of travel and maneuver instructions appear in the multifunction display. Please refer to the COMAND* manual for instructions on how to activate the route guidance system. Vehicle status message memory menu Use the vehicle status message memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the system. Such messages appear in the multifunction display and are based on conditions or system status the vehicle’s system has recorded. The vehicle status message memory menu only appears if there are any messages stored in the system. Controls in detail Control system Warning! G Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner’s and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to address the malfunction and warning messages (컄 page 368). 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the vehicle status message memory appears in the multifunction display. If the vehicle status message memory menu does not appear, then there are no messages stored. Vehicle status messages have been recorded If conditions have occurred causing status messages to be recorded, the number of messages appears in the multifunction display: Should the vehicle’s system record any conditions while driving, the number of messages will reappear in the multifunction display when the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch: 왘 Press button Jrepeatedly until you have seen all occurred messages. i 1 Number of messages 왘 Press button j or k. The stored messages will now be displayed in the order in which they have occurred. For malfunction and warning messages, see “Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display” (컄 page 368). The vehicle status message memory will be cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2. You will then only see high-priority messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 368). 133 Controls in detail Control system Settings menu The following settings and submenus are available in the Settings... menu: Resetting all settings Function Page You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings. The function To reset: Press reset button for 3 seconds for resetting all settings to factory standard. Resetting all settings 134 왘 Instrument cluster submenu 137 앫 A collection of submenus for performing individual settings for your vehicle. Time/date submenu 137 Lighting submenu 143 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the Settings... menu appears in the multifunction display. Vehicle submenu 147 Convenience submenu 147 In the Settings... menu are two functions: 앫 Submenus in the Settings menu 135 Press the reset button Jon the instrument cluster (컄 page 24) for approximately 3 seconds. The request to press the reset button Jonce more to confirm appears in the multifunction display. 왘 Press the reset button Jagain. The functions of all submenus will be reset to the factory settings. The message Reset to factory settings appears in the multifunction display. 134 Controls in detail Control system i Submenus in the Settings menu For safety reasons, the following function cannot be reset while driving: 왘 앫 Press button j. In the multifunction display you see the collection of the submenus. the function Lamp circuit headlamp mode in the Lighting submenu The following message appears in the multifunction display: Lighting Cannot be completely reset to factory settings while driving. i 왘 Press button ç. The submenus are arranged by hierarchy. Scroll up with button æ, and scroll down with button ç. With the selection marker on the desired submenu, use the j button to access the individual functions within that submenu. Once within the submenu, you can use the j button to move to the next function or the k button to move to the previous function within that submenu. The settings themselves are made with button æ or ç. The selection marker moves to the next submenu. Your individual settings will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button Jagain. After 5 seconds the Settings... menu reappears in the multifunction display. 135 Controls in detail Control system The table below shows what settings can be changed within the various submenus. Detailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following pages. Instrument cluster Time/Date Lighting Vehicle Convenience* (컄 page 137) (컄 page 139) (컄 page 143) (컄 page 147) (컄 page 147) Selecting digital speedometer display mode Time synchronization with head unit* Daytime running lamp mode (USA only) Setting automatic locking Activating easy-entry/exit feature* Selecting language Setting the time (hours) Locator lighting Selecting display (speed Setting the time display or outside (minutes) temperature) for status Setting the date (month) indicator Setting the date (day) Setting the date (year) 136 Night security illumination Interior lighting delayed shut-off Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror* Controls in detail Control system Instrument cluster submenu Access the Instr. cluster submenu via the Settings... menu. Use the Instr. cluster submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings. The following functions are available: Selecting digital speedometer display mode 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Instr. cluster submenu. 왘 Function Page Selecting speedometer display mode 137 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Display unit Digital speedometer in the multifunction display. Selecting language 137 The selection marker is on the current setting. Selecting language 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Instr. cluster submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Language in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. Selecting display (speed display 138 or outside temperature) for status indicator 왘 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the speedometer unit to km or miles. Press button æ or ç to select the desired language to be used for the multifunction display messages. 컄컄 137 Controls in detail Control system 컄컄 Available languages: 앫 German 앫 English 앫 Italian 앫 French 앫 Spanish Selecting display (speed display or outside temperature) for status indicator 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Instr. cluster submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Select display in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Press button æ or ç to select the desired setting. The selected display is then shown continuously in the lower display. The other display now appears in the menu of the standard display: 앫 Digital speedometer or 앫 138 Outside temperature Controls in detail Control system Time/Date submenu Access the Time/Date submenu via the Settings... menu. Use the Time/Date submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings. Time and date synchronization with head unit* This function can only be seen on vehicles with COMAND* and navigation module*. 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Time/Date submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Synchronization with head unit in the multifunction display. The following functions are available: Function Page Time synchronization with head 139 unit* Setting the time (hours) 139 Setting the time (minutes) 140 Setting the date (month) 141 Setting the date (day) 141 Setting the date (year) 142 The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Setting the time (hours) This function can be seen in vehicles with audio system, or in vehicles with COMAND* and navigation module*, if the time and date synchronization with head unit* feature was set to Off (컄 page 139). i Vehicles with COMAND*: For information on setting the time in COMAND, refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions. Press button æ or ç to select the desired setting. 139 Controls in detail Control system 왘 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Time/Date submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Clock, hours in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the hours. Setting the time (minutes) 왘 This function can be seen in vehicles with audio system, or in vehicles with COMAND* and navigation module*, if the time and date synchronization with head unit* feature was set to Off (컄 page 139). Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Time/Date submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Clock, minutes in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the minutes. i Vehicles with COMAND*: For information on setting the time in COMAND, refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions. 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the correct hours displayed in the multifunction display. 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the correct minutes displayed in the multifunction display. 왘 Press reset button Jto confirm the set hours. 왘 Press reset button Jto confirm the set minutes. 140 Controls in detail Control system Setting the date (month) This function can be seen in vehicles with audio system, or in vehicles with COMAND* and navigation module*, if the time and date synchronization with head unit* feature was set to Off (컄 page 139). 왘 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Time/Date submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Set date month in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the month. i Vehicles with COMAND*: For information on setting the time in COMAND, refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions. Setting the date (day) This function can be seen in vehicles with audio system, or in vehicles with COMAND* and navigation module*, if the time and date synchronization with head unit* feature was set to Off (컄 page 139). i Vehicles with COMAND*: For information on setting the time in COMAND, refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions. 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the month. 141 Controls in detail Control system 왘 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Time/Date submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Set date day in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the day. Setting the date (year) 왘 This function can be seen in vehicles with audio system, or in vehicles with COMAND* and navigation module*, if the time and date synchronization with head unit* feature was set to Off (컄 page 139). Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Time/Date submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Set date year in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the year. i Vehicles with COMAND*: For information on setting the time in COMAND, refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions. 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the day. 142 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the year. Controls in detail Control system Daytime running lamp mode (USA only) Lighting submenu Access the Lighting submenu via the Settings... menu. Use the Lighting submenu to change the lamp and lighting settings on your vehicle. i This function is not available in countries where the daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode. The following functions are available: Function Page Daytime running lamp mode (USA only) 143 Locator lighting 144 Night security illumination 145 Interior lighting delayed shut-off 146 왘 왘 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Lighting submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Lamp circuit headlamp mode in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. Press button æ or ç to select manual operation (manual) or daytime running lamp mode (constant) activated. With daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position M or U, the low beam headlamps are switched on when the engine is running. In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally: 앫 Parking lamps 앫 Tail lamps 앫 License plate lamps 앫 Side marker lamps For more information on the daytime running lamp mode, see “Lighting” (컄 page 110). 143 Controls in detail Control system i Locator lighting 왘 For safety reasons, resetting all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings while driving (컄 page 134) will not deactivate the daytime running lamp mode. With the locator lighting feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position U, the following lamps will switch on during darkness when the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey: Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Lighting submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Function Surround lighting in the multifunction display. The following message appears in the multifunction display: 앫 Parking lamps 앫 Tail lamps 앫 License plate lamps 앫 Side marker lamps 앫 Front fog lamps Lighting Cannot be completely reset to factory settings while driving. The locator lighting switches off when the driver’s door is opened. If you do not open a door after unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps will switch off automatically after approximately 40 seconds. The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch the locator lighting function On. 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U when exiting the vehicle (컄 page 55). The locator lighting feature is activated. 144 Controls in detail Control system Night security illumination (Headlamps delayed shut-off) Use this function to set whether or not the exterior lamps illuminate during darkness after exiting the vehicle and all doors closed. With the delayed shut-off feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position U before the engine is turned off, the following lamps will switch on when the engine is turned off and remain lit for approximately 15 seconds: 앫 Parking lamps 앫 Tail lamps 앫 License plate lamps 앫 Side marker lamps 앫 Front fog lamps If after turning off the engine you do not open a door or do not close an opened door, the lamps will automatically switch off after 60 seconds. The selection marker is on the current setting. i You can reactivate this function within 10 minutes by opening a door. 왘 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Lighting submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Headlamps delayed shut-off in the multifunction display. 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the function to On or Off. 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U before turning off the engine (컄 page 55). 145 Controls in detail Control system You can temporarily deactivate the delayed shut-off feature: 왘 Before exiting the vehicle, turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0. 왘 Then turn it to position 2 and back to position 0. The delayed shut-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in the starter switch. 146 Interior lighting delayed shut-off The selection marker is on the current setting. Use this function to set whether or not the interior lighting remains lit during darkness for approximately 10 seconds after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch. 왘 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Lighting submenu. Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Interior lighting delayed shut-off in the multifunction display. 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the function to On or Off. Controls in detail Control system Vehicle submenu Setting automatic locking Convenience* submenu Access the Vehicle submenu via the Settings... menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to make general vehicle settings. Access the Convenience submenu via the Settings... menu. Use the Convenience Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Vehicle submenu. Function Page Activating easy-entry/exit feature* 148 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Automatic door lock in the multifunction display. Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror* 148 Function Page Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic locking system. With the automatic locking system activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). Setting automatic locking 147 왘 The following function is available: For additional information on central locking, see “Automatic central locking” (컄 page 101). 왘 submenu to change the settings for a number of convenience features. The following functions are available: The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the automatic central locking to On or Off. 147 Controls in detail Control system Activating easy-entry/exit feature* 왘 Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature (컄 page 43). Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Convenience submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Function Easy-entry feature in the multifunction display. Warning! G The selection marker is on the current setting. You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. 앫 Move steering column lever* (컄 page 43). Press one of the memory position buttons* or the memory button M* (컄 page 107). Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver’s door and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 148 Use this function to select whether the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror should be turned downward during parking maneuvers when reverse gear R is engaged. For additional information, see “Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position (parking aid)” (컄 page 108). 왘 To cancel steering wheel movement, do one of the following: 앫 Setting parking position* for exterior rear view mirror 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the function to On or Off. Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Convenience submenu. Controls in detail Control system 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Mirror adjustment Parking aid in the multifunction display. Trip computer menu The selection marker is on the current setting. The following information is available: Fuel consumption statistics after start Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle. Function Page Fuel consumption statistics after 149 start 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the function to On or Off. Fuel consumption statistics since last reset 150 Calling up range (distance to empty) 151 i When you enter the trip computer menu, you will always see the fuel consumption statistics after start first. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see After start in the multifunction display. 1 Statistics called up: since start 2 Time elapsed since start 3 Average fuel consumption since start 4 Average speed since start 5 Distance driven since start 149 Controls in detail Control system i Fuel consumption since last reset All statistics stored since the last engine start will be reset approximately four hours after the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch. 왘 Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time period. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu. Press button j or k repeatedly until you see After reset in the multifunction display. 왘 Press and hold reset button Juntil the values of the statistics are reset to 0. Resetting fuel consumption statistics automatically The values of the statistics will be automatically reset to 0 when one of the following values exceeds: 1 Statistics called up: since last reset 2 Time elapsed since last reset 3 Average fuel consumption since last reset 4 Average speed since last reset 5 Distance driven since last reset 150 Resetting fuel consumption statistics manually 앫 distance: 100000 miles (100000 km) 앫 elapsed time: 10000 hours Controls in detail Control system Calling up range (distance to empty) 왘 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu. Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Range: in the multifunction display. In the multifunction display you will see the calculated range based on the current fuel tank level. TEL menu* Warning! G A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road, and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury. You can use the functions in the TEL menu to operate your telephone, provided it is connected to a hands-free system and switched on. 왘 Switch on the telephone and Audio or COMAND*. See separate operating instructions. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see the TEL menu in the multifunction display. 151 Controls in detail Control system Which messages will appear in the multifunction display depends on whether your telephone is switched on or off: 앫 앫 If the telephone is switched off, the message in the multifunction display is: PHONE off. Answering a call Rejecting a call When your telephone is ready to receive calls, you can answer a call at any time. In the multifunction display you will see the message: If you do not wish to receive the call, you can choose to reject it. 왘 You have rejected the call. The caller receives a busy signal. If the telephone is switched on: The telephone will then search for a network. During this time the multifunction display is empty. As soon as the telephone has found a network, Ready is indicated in the multifunction display. Ending a call 왘 Audio system 152 Press button t. You have ended the call. The standby message appears in the multifunction display. COMAND* This standby message indicates that your telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system. Press button t. 왘 Press button s. You have answered the call. The duration of the call appears in the multifunction display. Controls in detail Control system Dialing a number from the phone book If your telephone is ready to receive calls, you may select and dial a number from the phone book at any time. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see the TEL menu and the standby message in the multifunction display. 왘 Press button j or k. The control system reads the phone book which is stored in the telephone. This may take up to 30 seconds. In the multifunction display you will see the message Please wait. When the message Please wait disappears, the phone book has been loaded. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display. 왘 Press button s. The control system dials the selected phone number. The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order. 앫 If the connection is successful, the name of the party you called and the duration of the call will appear in the display. 앫 If no connection is made, the control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory. 1 Selected name from phone book i If you press and hold button j or k for longer than 1 second, the system scrolls rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again. or 왘 Cancel the call you have intended to make by pressing button t. Cancel the quick search mode by pressing button t. 153 Controls in detail Control system Redialing The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the need to search through your entire phone book. 왘 왘 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the desired number or name appears in the multifunction display. 왘 Press button s. The control system dials the selected phone number. Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see the TEL menu and the standby message in the multifunction display. If the connection is successful, the duration of the call will appear in the multifunction display, and Press button s. 앫 In the multifunction display you will see the first number in the redial memory. the name of the party if stored in the phone book or 앫 instead of it the dialed number or 왘 154 Cancel the call you have intended to make by pressing button t. Controls in detail Manual transmission 왔 Manual transmission Manual transmission is standard equipment on select models and not available on all models. Warning! For information on driving with a manual transmission, see “Manual transmission” (컄 page 51). For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, getting out of your vehicle with the gearshift lever not engaged in first or reverse gear and parking brake engaged is dangerous. G Also, when parked on an incline, an engaged first or reverse gear alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects. Always set the parking brake in addition to engaging first or reverse gear (컄 page 59). When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb. Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gearshift lever, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury. Warning! G On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. 155 Controls in detail Manual transmission ! Shifting into reverse When you are shifting into the 5th or 6th gear, make sure that you press the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise, you could accidentally shift into the 3rd or 4th gear and damage the transmission. Gearshift pattern for manual transmission Downshifting gears leading to overrevving the engine can result in engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using the clutch pedal. The clutch may be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Do not exceed the engine speed limits. Refer to tachometer (컄 page 121) for engine speeds. 156 ! Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehicle is stationary, as the transmission could otherwise be damaged. 왘 Stop the vehicle completely. 왘 Fully depress the clutch pedal. 왘 Move the gearshift lever to the neutral position (no gear selected). 왘 Move the gearshift lever to the left until you feel a certain resistance. 왘 Push the gearshift lever past this resistance. 왘 Then move the gearshift lever forward into position R. Controls in detail Automatic transmission* 왔 Automatic transmission* For more information on driving with an automatic transmission, see “Automatic transmission*” (컄 page 51). Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions. i During the brief warm-up, transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature. The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on: 앫 the gear selector lever position D (컄 page 159) with gear ranges (컄 page 160) 앫 the selected program mode: (C/S) (컄 page 163) or If the operating conditions change, the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its shift program. (M/C/S) (SLK 55 AMG only) (컄 page 169) 앫 the position of the accelerator pedal (컄 page 162) 앫 the vehicle speed Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission 157 Controls in detail Automatic transmission* Warning! 1 Current gear range/gear selector lever position 2 Current program mode The current gear range/gear selector lever position and program mode (C/S) or (M/C/S) appear in the multifunction display. 158 ! G Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped. Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. When the gear selector lever is in position D, you can influence transmission shifting by: 앫 limiting the gear range 앫 changing gears manually Controls in detail Automatic transmission* Gear selector lever position Effect ì Park position Gear selector lever position when the vehicle is parked. Place gear selector lever in position P only when vehicle is stopped. The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to placing the gear selector lever in position P to secure the vehicle. Effect The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P. With the SmartKey removed, the gear selector lever is locked in position P. If the vehicle’s electrical system is malfunctioning, the gear selector lever could remain locked in position P (컄 page 396). í Reverse gear Place gear selector lever in position R only when vehicle is stopped. Effect ë Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed). To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage N while driving. If the ESP® is deactivated or malfunctioning: Move gear selector lever to N only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. ê Drive The transmission shifts automatically. All forward gears are available. 159 Controls in detail Automatic transmission* ! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason with gear selector lever in N can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Warning! G Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects. Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P (컄 page 52). When parked on an incline, turn the front wheels towards the road curb. Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. 160 Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear selector lever from position P, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Gear ranges With the gear selector lever in position D and driving in the automatic shift program C or S (컄 page 163), you can select a gear range for the automatic transmission to operate within: Gear selector lever (컄 page 164): You can limit the gear range by pressing the gear selector lever to the left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the gear selector lever to the right (D+). Steering wheel gearshift control (컄 page 165): You can limit the gear range by pressing the respective downshift button on the steering wheel gearshift control, and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the respective upshift button on the steering wheel gearshift control. Controls in detail Automatic transmission* The selected gear range appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 158). If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected. Effect ï The transmission shifts through sixth gear only. î The transmission shifts through fifth gear only. é The transmission shifts through fourth gear only. Effect è The transmission shifts through third gear only. With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine. ç The transmission shifts through second gear only. Allows the use of engine’s braking power when driving: 앫 on steep downgrades 앫 in mountainous regions 앫 under extreme operating conditions æ The transmission operates in first gear only. For maximum use of engine’s braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades. 161 Controls in detail Automatic transmission* Stopping Driving tips Working on the vehicle When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights: G Accelerator position 왘 Leave the transmission in gear. Warning! Your driving style influences the transmission’s shifting behavior: 왘 Hold the vehicle with the brake. Less throttle Earlier upshifting When you stop longer with the engine idling and/or on a hill: More throttle Later upshifting When working on the vehicle, set the parking brake and move gear selector lever to position P. Otherwise the vehicle could roll away. Kickdown Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration. 왘 왘 Press the accelerator past the point of resistance. 왘 Set the parking brake. 왘 Move the gear selector lever to position P. Maneuvering When you maneuver in tight areas, e.g. when pulling into a parking space: The transmission shifts into a lower gear. 왘 Control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes. Ease on the accelerator when you have reached the desired speed. 왘 Accelerate gently. 왘 Never abruptly step on the accelerator. The transmission shifts up again. 162 Controls in detail Automatic transmission* Automatic shift program ! The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the center console. Never change the program mode when the gear selector lever is out of position P. This could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be prepared. 왘 Press program mode selector switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of the desired program mode appears in the multifunction display. Select C for comfort driving: 앫 The vehicle starts out in second gear (both forward and reverse) for gentler starts. This does not apply if full throttle is applied or gear range 1 is selected. 앫 Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads. 앫 Upshifts occur earlier even when you give more gas. The engine then operates at lower rpms and the wheels are less likely to spin. i The last selected program mode (C or S) is switched on when the engine is restarted. 1 Program mode selector switch C Comfort For comfort driving S Sport For standard driving The current gear selector lever position and the selected program mode (C/S) are indicated in the multifunction display (컄 page 158). 163 Controls in detail Automatic transmission* Gear selector lever one-touch gearshifting Even with an automatic transmission, you can change the gears manually and limit or extend the gear range for automatic shifting with the gear selector lever in position D and driving in the automatic program mode C or S. Downshifting Warning! Upshifting G On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped. Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 164 왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D+ direction. The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmission. Canceling gear range limit 왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the D- direction. The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission (컄 page 160). i To avoid overrevving the engine when the gear selector lever is moved to the D- direction, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s max. speed would be exceeded. 왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D+ direction until D reappears in the multifunction display. The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D. Shifting into optimal gear range 왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D- direction. The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration. This will involve shifting down one or more gears. Controls in detail Automatic transmission* Steering wheel gearshift control one-touch gearshifting The steering wheel gearshift control provides an alternative method for changing the gears manually and limiting or extending the gear range for automatic shifting with the gear selector lever in position D and driving in the automatic program mode C or S. i To avoid overrevving the engine when downshifting with steering wheel gearshift buttons, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s max. speed would be exceeded. Steering wheel gearshift control* SLK 280, SLK 350 The steering wheel gearshift buttons are located to the left and right of the steering wheel. ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped. Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 1 Button, inside: downshift 2 Button, outside: upshift 165 Controls in detail Automatic transmission* i You cannot shift with the steering wheel gearshift buttons when the gear selector lever is in position P, N or R. The last selected program mode (C or S) is switched on when the engine is restarted. Upshifting Downshifting Warning! G On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. 왘 Briefly press the inside 1 of one of the buttons on the steering wheel. The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission (컄 page 160). 166 왘 Briefly press the outside 2 of one of the buttons on the steering wheel. The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmission. Controls in detail Automatic transmission* Canceling gear range limit 왘 Press and hold the outside 2 of one of the buttons on the steering wheel until D reappears in the multifunction display. Steering wheel gearshift control SLK 55 AMG The steering wheel gearshift buttons are located to the left and right of the steering wheel. The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D. i You cannot shift with the steering wheel gearshift buttons when the gear selector lever is in position P, N or R. The last selected program mode (C or S) is switched on when the engine is restarted in the automatic program mode. Shifting into optimal gear range 왘 The following instructions describe operation of the steering wheel gearshift control when driving in the automatic program mode C or S. Press and hold the inside 1 of one of the buttons on the steering wheel. The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration. This will involve shifting down one or more gears. 1 Left button: downshift 2 Right button: upshift For instructions on operating the steering wheel gearshift control and gear selector lever in the manual program mode M, see “Manual shift program SLK 55 AMG” (컄 page 169). 167 Controls in detail Automatic transmission* Downshifting Warning! G On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. 왘 Briefly press button 1 on the left side of the steering wheel. The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission (컄 page 160) when you are driving in the automatic program mode (C or S). 168 Upshifting Canceling gear range limit 왘 왘 Briefly press button 2 on the right side of the steering wheel. The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmission when you are driving in the automatic program mode (C or S). Press and hold button 2 on the right side of the steering wheel until D reappears in the multifunction display. The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D. Shifting into optimal gear range 왘 Press and hold button 1 on the left side of the steering wheel. The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration. This will involve shifting down one or more gears. Controls in detail Automatic transmission* Manual shift program SLK 55 AMG ! In addition to the automatic shift program C or S, your vehicle is equipped with the manual shift program M. Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. In the manual program mode M, system-controlled automatic gearshifting is switched off and you need to change the gears by manually upshifting or downshifting using the steering wheel gearshift buttons to the left and right of the steering wheel (컄 page 167) or the gear selector lever. The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the center console. Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped. Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 1 Program mode selector switch M Manual For manual gear shifting C Comfort For comfort driving S Sport For standard driving 169 Controls in detail Automatic transmission* The current gear selector lever position and the selected program mode (M/C/S) are indicated in the multifunction display (컄 page 158). i For information on automatic program modes C or S, see “Automatic shift program” (컄 page 163), “Gear selector lever one-touch gearshifting” (컄 page 164), and “Steering wheel gearshift control one-touch gearshifting” (컄 page 165). Activating manual shift program 왘 Press program mode selector switch 1 repeatedly until the M for manual program mode M appears in the multifunction display. The transmission switches to the manual program mode M. Automatic shifting is switched off. The gear range is not limited. You can change the gears manually when the gear selector lever is in position D. You can upshift or downshift through the gears in succession. i The manual program mode M will not be stored. When the engine is turned off with the manual program mode M selected, the transmission will go to the automatic program mode (C or S) when the engine is restarted. 170 Upshifting ! In the manual program mode M, the transmission will not upshift, even if the engine has reached its overrevving range. Shift up to the next gear before the engine has reached its overrevving range. Make absolutely certain that the engine speed does not reach the red marking on the tachometer (컄 page 24). Otherwise the engine could be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Controls in detail Automatic transmission* 왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D+ direction. or 왘 Warning! Briefly press button 2 on the right side of the steering wheel (컄 page 167). The transmission shifts to the next higher gear. If, instead of the manual program mode symbol M, the p symbol appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 158), shift to the next higher gear. The fuel supply will otherwise be interrupted to prevent the engine from overrevving. Kickdown Downshifting G Using the kickdown when driving in the manual program mode M is not possible. On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. 왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the D- direction. or 왘 Briefly press button 1 on the left side of the steering wheel (컄 page 167). The transmission shifts to the next lower gear. i When you brake or stop, the transmission shifts down to a gear from which you can easily accelerate or take off. 171 Controls in detail Automatic transmission* Deactivating manual shift program 왘 Press the program mode selector switch (컄 page 169) repeatedly until C or S appears in the multifunction display. or 왘 Restart the engine. The transmission will go to the automatic program mode (C or S). The manual program mode M is not stored. 172 Emergency operation (Limp Home Mode) If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in limp home (emergency operation) mode. In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be activated. 왘 Stop the vehicle. 왘 Move gear selector lever to P. 왘 Turn off the engine. 왘 Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting. 왘 Restart the engine. 왘 Move gear selector lever to position D (for second gear) or R. 왘 Have the transmission checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Controls in detail Good visibility 왔 Good visibility For information on the windshield wipers, see (컄 page 56). Headlamp cleaning system* The button is located on the left side of the dashboard. i Rear view mirrors The headlamps will automatically be cleaned when you have 앫 switched on the headlamps and 앫 For more information on setting the rear view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 45). operated the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid 15 times Interior rear view mirror, antiglare position When you switch off ignition, the counter resets. 1 Headlamp cleaning button 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). 왘 Press button 1. For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*” (컄 page 315). 왘 Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night position by moving the lever towards the windshield. The interior rear view mirror is dimmed. The headlamps are cleaned with a high-pressure water jet. 173 Controls in detail Good visibility Auto-dimming mirrors* The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirrors and the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when 앫 ignition is switched on and 앫 incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view mirror Warning! G The auto-dimming function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the interior rear view mirror. The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not react, for example, if the wind screen is installed. Glare can endanger you and others. The rear view mirrors will not react if 앫 reverse gear R is engaged 앫 interior lighting is switched on Warning! G In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may escape from the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks. Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or the respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. 174 ! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water. Warning! G Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. Controls in detail Good visibility Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position* Follow these steps to activate the mirror parking position so that the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward during parking maneuvers to the stored position. The switches are located on the lower part of the center console. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). 왘 Store a parking position* for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror (컄 page 108). 왘 Switch the Mirror adjustment Parking aid function* in the Convenience submenu of the control system to ON (컄 page 148). 왘 Press switch 3 for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. 왘 Shift into reverse gear R. The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror returns to its previously stored driving position: 앫 10 seconds after you shifted out of reverse gear R 앫 immediately once you exceed a vehicle speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) 앫 immediately when you press adjustment switch 2 The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror turns downwards to the stored position. 1 Driver-side exterior rear view mirror 2 Adjustment switch 3 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror 175 Controls in detail Good visibility Sun visors Warning! The sun visors protect you from sun glare while driving. G Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare can endanger you and others. 1 Mirror lamp* 2 Mounting* 3 Mirror cover 4 Sun visor 176 i If sunlight enters through a side window, disengage sun visor from mounting* 2 and pivot it to the side. You then can slide the sun visor along the pivot arm to a different position if so desired. 왘 Swing sun visors down when you experience glare. The mirror lamp* 1 will switch off as soon as sun visor is disengaged from mounting* 2. 왘 To use mirror and switch on mirror lamp*, lift up mirror cover 3. ! Close mirror cover 3 if open before you disengage the sun visor 4 from mounting* 2 and pivot it to the side. Controls in detail Good visibility Rear window defroster The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power. To keep the battery drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear. The defroster is automatically deactivated after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on the outside temperature. Warning! G Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, endangering you and others. Switching on Switching off 왘 왘 Press the rear window defroster switch F in the control panel of the climate control (컄 page 179) or the automatic climate control* (컄 page 192). Press the rear window defroster switch F again in the control panel of the climate control or the automatic climate control*. The indicator lamp on the rear window defroster switch F comes on. The indicator lamp on the rear window defroster switch F goes out. ! ! The rear window defroster cannot be switched on when the retractable hardtop is open. The indicator lamp starts flashing if the hardtop is open. If the rear window defroster switches off too soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing, this means that too many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery. The system responds automatically by deactivating the rear window defroster. 앫 Close the retractable hardtop first. The rear window defroster can be switched on again. As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the rear window defroster automatically turns itself back on. 177 Controls in detail Climate control 178 Controls in detail Climate control Item 1 Thumbwheel for air volume control for adjustable left side air vent Item d Climate control panel 2 Left side air vent, adjustable i 3 Fixed air vent for defrosting left side window When you turn the thumbwheels 5 and 8 upwards to the first stop, the fixed center air vents 4 and 9 and the adjustable center air vents 6 and 7 are open. 4 Left center air vent, fixed 5 Thumbwheel for air volume control for fixed/adjustable left center air vents 6 Left center air vent, adjustable 7 Right center air vent, adjustable 8 Thumbwheel for air volume control for fixed/adjustable right center air vents 9 Right center air vent, fixed a Fixed air vent for defrosting right side window b Right side air vent, adjustable c Thumbwheel for air volume control for adjustable right side air vent When you turn the thumbwheels completely upwards, only the adjustable center air vents 6 and 7 are open. For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for the center air vents 6 and 7 to the middle position. Item 1 Temperature control, left side 2 Air volume control, climate control on/off 3 Air distribution control 4 Temperature control, right side 5 F Rear window defroster (컄 page 177) 6 P Front defroster 7 9 AC cooling on/off, Residual heat/ventilation 8 , Air recirculation 179 Controls in detail Climate control The climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. The system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature. Warning! G When operating the climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution controls (컄 page 179) to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin. 180 Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air enters the interior through the air distribution system. The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated (컄 page 179). Warning! G Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others. i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior. If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off. The climate control will then adjust the interior temperature to the set value much faster. Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris. When the retractable hardtop is closed, do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window. Controls in detail Climate control Switching climate control system on/off Switching on 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). 왘 Set air volume control 2 to any speed (컄 page 179). The previous settings are once again in effect. Switching off 왘 Set air volume control 2 (컄 page 179) to position 0. i Setting the temperature Use temperature controls 1 and 4 (컄 page 179) to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). The climate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible. Increasing 왘 Turn temperature control 1 and/or 4 (컄 page 179) slightly clockwise. The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature. Decreasing 왘 Turn temperature control 1 and/or 4 (컄 page 179) slightly counterclockwise. The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature. When the climate control system is switched off, the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off. Only choose this setting for a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog up. 181 Controls in detail Climate control Adjusting air distribution Use air distribution control 3 (컄 page 179) to adjust the air distribution. The following symbols are found on the control: Symbol Function a Directs air through the center and side air vents Z Directs air to the windows and through the center and side air vents b Directs air into the entire vehicle interior Y Directs air to the footwells and through the center and side air vents 182 왘 Turn the air distribution control to the desired symbol (컄 page 179). Opening the center air vents 왘 The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air distribution. i You can also turn the control to a position between two symbols. Turn thumbwheels 5 and 8 (컄 page 178) upward to the first stop. Center air vents 4, 6, 7 and 9 are open. 왘 Turn thumbwheels 5 and 8 (컄 page 178) upward all the way. Only center air vents 6 and 7 are open. Controls in detail Climate control Closing the center air vents 왘 Turn thumbwheels 5 and 8 (컄 page 178) downward all the way. Center air vents 4, 6, 7 and 9 are closed. Opening and closing side air vents 왘 Adjusting air volume Ten blower speeds are available. 왘 Use air volume control 2 (컄 page 179) to adjust the air volume. Basic settings Heating (winter) 왘 Turn temperature controls 1 and 4 (컄 page 179) to the desired position. 왘 Turn air volume control 2 (컄 page 179) to level 2 or higher. Turn thumbwheels 1 and c (컄 page 178) in the required direction. Side air vents 2 and b are open or closed. Otherwise the windows may fog over. 왘 Turn air distribution control 3 (컄 page 179) to a position between b and Y. 왘 Open the side air vents if necessary. 왘 Close the center air vents. 183 Controls in detail Climate control Heating (summer) 왘 Turn air temperature control 1 and 4 (컄 page 179) to the desired position. Defrosting windshield You can use this setting to defrost the windshield, for example if it is iced up. You can also defog the side windows. 왘 Turn air volume control 2 (컄 page 179) to level 1 or higher. i 왘 Turn air distribution control 3 (컄 page 179) to position a. Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the side windows are clear again. 왘 Open the center and side air vents. 184 Activating 왘 Press button P (컄 page 179). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air conditioning switches automatically to the following functions: 앫 cooling on to dehumidify 앫 maximum blowing and heating power 앫 air flows onto the windshield and the front side windows Controls in detail Climate control Deactivating Windshield fogged on the outside 왘 Press button P (컄 page 179) again. 왘 The indicator lamp on the button goes out. Switch the windshield wipers on (컄 page 56). 왘 Turn air distribution control 3 to position a or Y (컄 page 179). The previous settings are once again in effect. Air recirculation mode Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside (e.g. before driving through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the interior. i The cooling remains switched on. Warning! G Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to fog on the inside, switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging. If interior window fogging persists, make sure the air conditioning (컄 page 187) is activated, or press button P. 185 Controls in detail Climate control Activating 왘 Briefly press button , (컄 page 179). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. Warning! G Never operate the side windows if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. The air recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside temperatures. In the event that the closing procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the , button or by pressing the respective power window switch. The indicator lamp on button , is not lit when the air recirculation mode is automatically switched on. The closing of the rear side windows can be immediately halted by releasing the , button. i A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes. i Deactivating 왘 Press button , (컄 page 179) again. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. i The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically: 앫 after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F (5°C) 앫 after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is turned off 앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F (5°C) If you press button , and keep it pressed, the side windows will close. The closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by releasing button ,. i If you press button , and keep it pressed, the side windows will open. The opening of the side windows can be immediately halted by releasing button ,. 186 Controls in detail Climate control Air conditioning The cooling function, only operational when the engine is running, cools the vehicle interior down to the selected temperature. The cooling function also dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior, thus preventing the windows from fogging up. i Condensation may drip from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. Warning! Deactivating Activating It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified. Moist air can fog up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning. 왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 179). The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The cooling function switches off after a short delay. 왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 179) again. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer. G If you turn off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when the weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others. 187 Controls in detail Climate control Maximum cooling 왘 Turn thumbwheels 5 and 8 (컄 page 178) upwards to the first stop. The fixed center air vents 4 and 9 (컄 page 178) and the adjustable air vents 6 and 7 (컄 page 178) are open. 왘 왘 For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for the center air vents 6 and 7 (컄 page 178) to the middle position. 왘 Turn thumbwheels 1 and c (컄 page 178) for the adjustable side air vents 2 and b (컄 page 178) to the fully open position. 왘 Set air distribution control 3 (컄 page 182) to position a. The air distribution directs the air through the center and side air vents. 188 Set air volume control 2 (컄 page 183) to position 5. The ventilation operates with maximum blower speed. 왘 Turn temperature controls 1 and 4 (컄 page 179) completely counterclockwise to their end stops. The lowest temperature for both sides is set. i When the vehicle’s interior has cooled down enough, reduce the air volume and increase the air temperature to comfortable settings if desired. Residual engine heat utilization With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine. Controls in detail Climate control Activating Deactivating 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 36). 왘 왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 179). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. i How long the system will provide heating depends on 앫 the coolant temperature 앫 the temperature set by the operator The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting. Press button 9 (컄 page 179) again. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. i The residual heat is automatically turned off 앫 when the ignition is switched on (컄 page 36) 앫 after about 30 minutes 앫 if the battery voltage drops 189 Controls in detail Automatic climate control* 190 Controls in detail Automatic climate control* Item 1 Thumbwheel for air volume control for adjustable left side air vent 2 Left side air vent, adjustable 3 Fixed air vent for defrosting left side window Item d Right side air vent, adjustable e Thumbwheel for air volume control for adjustable right side air vent f Automatic climate control panel 4 Left center air vent, fixed i 5 Thumbwheel for air volume control for fixed/adjustable left center air vents When you turn the thumbwheels 5 and a upwards to the first stop, the fixed center air vents 4 and b and the adjustable center air vents 6 and 9 are open. 6 Left center air vent, adjustable 7 Cockpit air vent 8 Thumbwheel for air volume control for cockpit air vent 9 Right center air vent, adjustable a Thumbwheel for air volume control for fixed/adjustable right center air vents When you turn the thumbwheels completely upwards, only the adjustable center air vents 6 and 9 are open. For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for the center air vents 6 and 9 to the middle position. b Right center air vent, fixed c Fixed air vent for defrosting right side window 191 Controls in detail Automatic climate control* Item 1 Air volume control, manual 2 U Automatic mode 3 P Front defroster 4 ‚ To increase temperature on the left side 5 ´ Automatic climate control on/off 6 ‚ To increase temperature on the right side 7 F Rear window defroster (컄 page 177) 8 Air distribution control, manual 9 T Residual heat/ventilation a œ AC cooling on/off b ƒ To lower temperature on the right side c ƒ To lower temperature on the left side d , Air recirculation e Display 192 Controls in detail Automatic climate control* The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can operate the automatic climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature. Warning! G When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution controls (컄 page 192) to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin. Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air enters the interior through the air distribution system. The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated (컄 page 192). Warning! G Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others. i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior. If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off. The climate control will then adjust the interior temperature to the set value much faster. Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris. When the retractable hardtop is closed, do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window. 193 Controls in detail Automatic climate control* Deactivating the climate control system Deactivating 왘 Reactivating 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). 왘 Press button ´ (컄 page 192) again. i The previous settings are once again in effect. When operating the climate control system in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution. Press button ´ (컄 page 192). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. i When the climate control system is switched off, the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off. Only choose this setting for a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog up. 194 Operating the climate control system in automatic mode or 왘 Press button U (컄 page 192). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. Air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically. In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is switched on. This function can be switched off if necessary. Controls in detail Automatic climate control* Activating 왘 Press button U (컄 page 192) while the engine is running. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically. 왘 Use temperature controls 4 and 6 or b and c (컄 page 192) to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. The temperature of the vehicle interior is adjusted automatically. Deactivating 왘 Press button U (컄 page 192) again. Setting the temperature Use temperature controls 4 and c for the left side or 6 and b for the right side (컄 page 192) to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). The climate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible. Increasing 왘 Press temperature button(s) 4 and/or 6 (컄 page 192) until the desired temperature appears in the control panel display e (컄 page 192). The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature. Decreasing 왘 Press temperature button(s) b and/or c (컄 page 192) until the desired temperature appears in the control panel display e (컄 page 192). The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The air volume changes to level 2 and the air distribution changes to b. Automatic control of air volume and air distribution is switched off. 195 Controls in detail Automatic climate control* Adjusting air distribution Use the air distribution control 8 (컄 page 192) to adjust the air distribution. The following symbols are found on the control: Symbol Function a Directs air through the center, side and cockpit air vents Z Directs air to the windows and side air vents b Directs air into the entire vehicle interior Y Directs air to the footwells and side air vents 196 왘 Turn air distribution control 8 (컄 page 192) to the desired position. Opening the cockpit air vent and center air vents The indicator lamp on the button U (컄 page 192) goes out. 왘 The automatic air distribution is switched off. The air distribution is controlled according to the selected control setting. i You can also turn the control to a position between two symbols. Turn thumbwheels 5 and a (컄 page 190) to the first stop and turn thumbwheel 8 (컄 page 190) upward all the way. The cockpit air vent 7 and the center air vents 4, 6, 9 and b are open. 왘 Turn thumbwheels 5 and a (컄 page 190) upward all the way. Only center air vents 6 and 9 are open. Controls in detail Automatic climate control* Closing the cockpit air vent and center air vents 왘 Turn thumbwheels 5, 8 and a (컄 page 190) downward. The cockpit air vent and the center air vents are closed. Opening and closing side air vents 왘 Adjusting air volume Defrosting windshield Use button U (컄 page 192) for automatic mode or air volume control 1 (컄 page 192) to adjust air volume manually. You can use this setting to defrost the windshield, for example if it is iced up. You can also defog the side windows. Eleven blower speeds are available. 왘 Turn air volume control 1 (컄 page 192) to the desired position. Turn thumbwheels 1 and e (컄 page 190) in the corresponding direction. The indicator lamp on the button U (컄 page 192) goes out. Side air vents 2 and d are open or closed. The automatic operation of air volume switches off. i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the side windows are clear again. 197 Controls in detail Automatic climate control* Activating Deactivating 왘 왘 Press button P (컄 page 192). Windows fogged on the outside Press button P (컄 page 192) again. i The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. Keep this setting selected only until the windshield is clear again. The air conditioning switches automatically to the following functions: The previous settings are once again in effect. 앫 cooling on to dehumidify i 앫 maximum blowing and heating power The cooling remains switched on. 앫 왘 Switch the windshield wipers on (컄 page 56). 왘 Press button U (컄 page 192). The indicator lamp on the button come on. Air distribution and air volume are adjusted automatically. air flows onto the windshield and the front side windows If the automatic air distribution and air volume are switched off: 왘 198 Turn air distribution control 8 to position a or Y (컄 page 192). Controls in detail Automatic climate control* Activating Maximum cooling MAX COOL Air recirculation mode When operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode U and there is a high need for cooling, MAX COOL is activated. This provides the fastest possible cooling of the vehicle’s interior (when retractable hardtop is closed). Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside (e.g. before driving through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the interior. MAX COOL will appear in display e (컄 page 192). Warning! G Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to fog on the inside, switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging. If interior window fogging persists, make sure the air conditioning (컄 page 187) is activated, or press button P. 왘 Press button , (컄 page 192). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. i The air recirculation mode activates automatically at high outside temperatures. The indicator lamp on button , is not lit when the air recirculation mode is automatically switched on. A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes. 컄컄 199 Controls in detail Automatic climate control* 컄컄 Warning! G Never operate the side windows if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the , button or by pressing the respective power window switch. The closing of the rear side windows can be immediately halted by releasing the , button. i Deactivating 왘 Press button , (컄 page 192) again. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. i The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically: 앫 after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F (5°C) 앫 after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is turned off (컄 page 200) 앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F (5°C) If you press button , and keep it pressed, the side windows will close. The closing of the windows can be immediately halted by releasing button ,. i If you press button , and keep it pressed, the side windows will open. The opening of the windows can be immediately halted by releasing button ,. 200 Air conditioning The cooling function, only operational when the engine is running, cools the vehicle interior down to the selected temperature. The cooling function also dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior, thus preventing the windows from fogging up. The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer. Controls in detail Automatic climate control* Warning! G If you turn off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others. Deactivating Activating It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified. Moist air can fog up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning. 왘 Press button œ (컄 page 192). 왘 Press button œ (컄 page 192). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. i Condensation may drip from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. 201 Controls in detail Automatic climate control* Residual heat and ventilation With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine. i How long the system will provide heating depends on Activating Deactivating 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 36). 왘 왘 Press button T (컄 page 192). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The display in the automatic climate control panel remains switched off. Press button T (컄 page 192) again. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. i The residual heat is automatically turned off: 앫 when the ignition is switched on (컄 page 36) 앫 the coolant temperature 앫 after about 30 minutes 앫 the temperature set by the operator 앫 if the battery voltage drops The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air volume control setting. 202 Controls in detail Audio system 왔 Audio system Audio and telephone*, operation Warning! These instructions are intended to help you become familiar with your Mercedes-Benz audio system. They contain useful tips and a detailed description of the user functions. G In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an accident, the driver should enter system settings with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the system only when road and traffic conditions permit. Always pay full attention to traffic conditions first before operating system controls while driving. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your car is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. Operating safety Warning! G Any alterations made to electronic components can cause malfunctions. The radio, amplifier, CD changer*, satellite radio* and telephone* are interconnected. When one of the components is not operational or has not been removed/replaced properly, the function of other components may be impaired. This condition might seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle. We recommend that you have any service work on electronic components carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 203 Controls in detail Audio system Operating and display elements 204 Controls in detail Audio system Item Page 1 CD changer mode selector 219 2 Single CD mode selector 222 Item Page 9 Speed dialing memory (telephone*) in descending order Item Page g Soft keys 206 h Volume 207 a Accepting a call (telephone*) 235 j Switching on/off 206 b Telephone* mode selector 229 k Manual tuning / seek tuning (radio) 211 c Speed dialing memory (telephone*) in ascending order 231 235 7 Display d Terminating a call (telephone*) 8 Alphanumeric keypad e CD slot 3 Radio mode selector 4 Mute function (radio) Pause (CD) 212 229 5 Volume distribution 208 6 Sound settings 207 f CD ejection Track search, reverse (CD) 228 l Manual tuning / seek tuning (radio) 211 Track search, fast forward (CD) 228 222 205 Controls in detail Audio system Button and soft key operation In these instructions, the alphanumeric keypad (right side of radio panel) and the function buttons (left side of radio panel) are referred to as “buttons”. The four keys below the display panel are referred to as “soft keys”. ! Operation i Switching the unit on/off If the radio is switched on without the SmartKey in the starter switch, it will automatically switch off again after approximately 30 minutes. Switching on 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 (컄 page 36). 왘 If the audio system was on as you removed the SmartKey from the starter switch, the audio system will automatically come back on as you turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2. Do not press directly in the display face. Otherwise, the display will be damaged. or 왘 206 PressDbutton. If your vehicle is equipped with a telephone, the display may prompt you to enter your PIN (GSM network) or code (TDMA or CDMA network). Controls in detail Audio system Switching off i 왘 If your vehicle equipment includes a Mercedes-Benz specified mobile telephone*, you can adjust its volume separately from the volume of the audio system while the telephone is being used. Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. or 왘 PressDbutton. i Should excessively high temperatures occur while the audio system is being operated, the display will dim. If temperatures continue to rise, HIGH TEMP will appear in the display, after which the audio system will be switched off for a cooling-down period. 왘 Adjusting sound functions The bass and treble functions are called up by pressing the O button. Settings for bass and treble are stored separately for the AM and FM wavebands, weather band, CD mode and telephone mode. Adjusting the volume 왘 Turn rotary control ofEbutton. The volume will increase or decrease depending on the direction turned. Press + or – soft key to increase or decrease tone level accordingly. or 왘 Press RES soft key briefly to reset bass tones to their center level. The radio switches back to the standard radio menu 8 seconds after the last soft key is pressed. Bass 왘 Press O button repeatedly until BASS appears in the display. 207 Controls in detail Audio system Adjusting treble 왘 왘 Press O button repeatedly until TREBLE appears in the display. Press + or – soft key to increase or decrease tone level accordingly. Returning sound functions to factory settings 왘 Press O button to call up settings menu in the display. 왘 Press RES soft key briefly; the respective sound function is reset to its center level. or 왘 Press RES soft key briefly to reset treble tones to their center level. The radio switches back to the standard radio menu 8 seconds after the last soft key is pressed. Press and hold RES soft key until RESET appears in the display. The sound settings for bass and treble are returned to their center level and the volume is set to a predefined level. The radio switches back to the standard radio menu 4 seconds after the last soft key is pressed. 208 왘 Press P button. BALANCE appears in the display. 왘 Press X or Y soft key. The volume is distributed between the left and right sides of the vehicle. or or 왘 Adjusting balance 왘 Press RES soft key briefly. The balance is reset to its center level. The radio switches back to the standard radio menu 8 seconds after the last button is pressed. Controls in detail Audio system Returning volume distribution to factory settings 왘 Press P button to call up settings menu in the display. Telephone* muting If your vehicle equipment includes a Mercedes-Benz specified mobile telephone*, you can adjust its volume separately from the volume of the audio system while the telephone* is being used. Radio operation Selecting radio mode 왘 Press b button. Calling up wavebands You can choose from among the FM, AM and WB wavebands. Weather band (컄 page 213). 왘 Press RES soft key briefly; the respective volume distribution is reset to its center (flat) level. i FM waveband: 87.7......107.9 MHz AM waveband: 530......1710 KHz or 왘 Press and hold RES soft key until RESET appears in the display. The volume distribution settings for the balance is set to the center level. The radio switches back to the standard radio menu 4 seconds after the last soft key is pressed. 209 Controls in detail Audio system Calling up wavebands for radios without SAT Calling up wavebands for radios with SAT 왘 왘 Press FM or AM soft key to switch between FM and AM. The FM and AM wavebands are called up one after another. or 왘 Press WB soft key. The weather band menu is called up. The waveband currently selected appears in the upper left-hand corner of the display. 210 Press FM, AM or WB soft key repeatedly until desired waveband has been selected. The FM, AM and WB wavebands are called up one after another. The waveband currently selected appears in the upper left-hand corner of the display. Selecting a station The following options are available for selecting a station: 앫 Direct frequency input (컄 page 211) 앫 Manual tuning (컄 page 211) 앫 Automatic seek tuning (컄 page 211) 앫 Scan search (컄 page 211) 앫 Station memory (컄 page 212) 앫 Automatic station memory (Autostore) (컄 page 212) The station search proceeds in the following frequency increments: 앫 0.2 MHz in FM range 앫 10 kHz in AM range Controls in detail Audio system Direct frequency input Manual tuning Scan search 왘 왘 Select desired waveband. 앫 왘 Press G or H button for approx. 3 seconds. 왘 Press button repeatedly until desired frequency has been reached. Select desired waveband. 왘 Press * button. 왘 Enter desired frequency with buttons 1 to R. i You can only enter frequencies within the respective waveband. If a button is not pressed within 4 seconds, the radio will return to the last station tuned. Step-by-step station tuning takes place in ascending or descending order. Each time the button is pressed, the radio tunes further by 0.2 MHz. During manual tuning, the radio is muted. Starting scan search 왘 Select desired waveband. 왘 Press SC soft key. SC will appear in the display. The Automatic seek tuning 왘 Select desired waveband. 왘 Press G or H button briefly. The radio will tune to the next highest or next lowest receivable frequency. i If no station is received after two consecutive scans of the complete frequency range, then the scan stops at the frequency from which it began. radio briefly (approximately 8 seconds) tunes in all receivable stations on the waveband selected. 앫 Ending scan search 왘 Press SC soft key or G or H. The station last played will be selected and SC disappears from the display. 211 Controls in detail Audio system Station memory Autostore – automatic station memory You can store ten AM and ten FM stations in the memory. The Autostore memory function provides an additional memory level. The station memory for manually stored stations is not overwritten. 앫 Storing stations 왘 Tune in desired station. 왘 Press and hold desired station button 1 to R until a brief signal tone is heard. 앫 Calling up Autostore memory level and storing stations Press desired station button 1 to R briefly. 앫 Press desired station button 1 to R. Leaving the Autostore memory level 왘 Press FM or AM soft key briefly. Interrupting radio mode Mute on 왘 왘 Press F button. The radio mode is interrupted and MUTED appears in the display. Press AS soft key briefly. The radio switches to the Autostore memory level. AS and SEARCH appear in the display and the radio finds the ten stations with the strongest signals. These stations are stored on the station buttons 1 to R in order of signal strength. 212 왘 앫 Calling up stations 왘 Calling up stations The radio mode is interrupted by an incoming call on the telephone* (컄 page 235). The frequency is stored on the selected station button. 앫 앫 앫 Mute off 왘 Press F button. The radio mode is again active. Controls in detail Audio system Weather band Search 왘 Press G or H button to tune in the next receivable weather band station. Scan search 앫 Starting scan search 왘 SC will appear in the display. The i 왘 Press WB soft key. The weather band station last received is tuned in. Selecting a weather band station directly 왘 If no weather band station is received after three consecutive scans of the complete frequency range, then the scan stops at the channel with which it began and NO WB FOUND appears in the display. If this happens, switch back to standard radio mode. Press SC soft key. radio briefly (approximately 8 seconds) tunes in all receivable weather band stations. 앫 Ending scan search 왘 Press SC soft key or G or H. The weather band station last played will be selected and SC disappears from the display. Select desired weather band station with buttons 1 to 7. If a station cannot be tuned in, a search is automatically started. 213 Controls in detail Audio system Introduction to satellite radio* (USA only) SIRIUS satellite radio provides 100 channels of digital-quality radio, among others music, sports, news, and entertainment, free of commercials. SIRIUS satellite radio uses a fleet of high-power satellites to broadcast 24 hours per day, coast to coast, in the contiguous U.S. This diverse, satellite-delivered programming is available for a monthly subscription fee. For more information and service availability, call the SIRIUS Service Center (컄 page 218), or contact www.siriusradio.com 214 i i Additional satellite radio equipment and a subscription to a satellite radio service provider are required for the satellite radio operation described here. Satellite radio service may be unavailable or interrupted from time to time for a variety of reasons, such as environmental or topographic conditions and other things beyond the service provider’s or our control. Service might also not be available in certain places (e.g., in tunnels, parking garages, or within or next to buildings) or near other technologies. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details and availability for your vehicle. Note that categories and channels shown in illustrations are dependent on programming content delivered by the service provider. Programming content is subject to change. Therefore, channels and categories shown in illustrations and descriptions contained in this manual may differ from the channels and categories delivered by the service provider. Program categories The channels are categorized. Categories allow you to tune to stations broadcasting a certain type of program (category mode) (컄 page 216). Controls in detail Audio system Calling up the SAT main menu 왘 Press SAT soft key. SAT is displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the display. Prior to activation of the satellite radio service (컄 page 215). After activation of satellite radio service (컄 page 215). Prior to activation of the satellite radio service 왘 Press ESN soft key. i The twelve-digit electronic serial number (ESN) of the SAT tuner* installed in your vehicle is displayed. The system will tune to a default station if no station had been selected previously. This information is required to call the SIRIUS Service Center for an activation request. i Credit card information may also be required for your application. The activation process takes approximately 5 to 10 minutes after calling the SIRIUS Service Center. After activation of the satellite radio service The telephone number of the SIRIUS Service Center (888-539-7474) is displayed. The satellite radio main menu appears. The radio station selected last is audible, provided it can be received. The first channel 001 is called up and the PTY system changes to All categories. If no station can be received, ACQUIRING appears in the display. If the Satellite radio service is not activated, ACQUIRING will also appear in the radio display and NO SAT will appear in the multifunction display. 215 Controls in detail Audio system Selecting a station Accessing via number keys The following options are available: 왘 앫 Selecting a station using the selected category (컄 page 217). 앫 Tuning via station presets (컄 page 216). 앫 Tuning via scan search (컄 page 217). 앫 Tuning via manual channel input (컄 page 216). 앫 Tuning via the program category list (컄 page 216). 왘 Input line appears in the main radio menu. Enter number of preset you wish to select, e.g. 1. The radio plays the station stored under this number and the PTY function changes to the category corresponding to the station. Tuning via manual channel input Press *. 왘 Use number keys to enter desired channel within 8 seconds, e.g. 1 6. The system tunes to channel 16. The station you have selected begins to play. i You can only enter available channel numbers. Tuning via station presets Ten satellite radio station presets are available. You can access the presets via number keys. 216 Tuning via the program category list Example: tuning in channel 16 The category list contains all currently receivable categories of programs. It is arranged alphabetically. Controls in detail Audio system 앫 The system will automatically switch to a station of the selected category if the currently selected station is not of the selected category. Otherwise, the currently selected station remains tuned. Selecting a category 왘 Press PTY soft key. 앫 The channels identified for the currently selected category are arranged numerically. Only one entry is visible at a time. The current PTY category of the station is displayed. 왘 Press <<< or >>> soft key. 왘 This switches between the individual categories. When changing the category, the channel selected last in the new category becomes audible. Tuning a station within the selected category Press G or H button briefly. The next station within the category is started. Tuning via scan search Scan search is characterized as follows: 앫 Scan search plays a channel for approx. 8 seconds and then skips to the next channel within the current category. 앫 Scan search can be terminated manually. 왘 Press SC soft key. The search starts. SC appears in the display. 왘 Press SC soft key again. The search stops. or 왘 Press and hold G or H button for approx. 3 seconds until desired station has been reached. 217 Controls in detail Audio system Obtaining additional text information Storing stations Calling up the ESN information menu Additional text information (artist, title) related to the current channel can be displayed. 왘 Tune in desired station. 왘 Press INF soft key. 왘 Press and hold desired station button 1 to R until a brief signal tone is heard. 왘 Press ESN soft key. 왘 Press INF soft key. The title being played is displayed. 왘 Press INF soft key again. The name of the artist performing the title being played is displayed. i If a button is not pressed within 4 seconds, the radio will return to the standard display. The frequency is stored on the selected station button. The radio saves the current station at the memory preset selected. The memory preset selected appears in the status line, e.g. S3. i There are ten presets available. An existing entry is overwritten in the memory list when a new entry is given. 218 The twelve-digit electronic serial number (ESN) of the SAT tuner* installed in your vehicle is displayed. 왘 Press RET soft key to exit the menu. Controls in detail Audio system CD mode Warning! Safety precautions Warning! G The single CD player and the CD changer* are Class 1 laser products. There is a danger of invisible laser radiation if the housing is opened or damaged. Do not open the housing. The single CD player and the CD changer* do not contain any parts that can be serviced by the user. For safety reasons, have any service work which may be necessary performed only by qualified personnel. G In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an accident, the driver should insert CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the audio system only if permitted by road, weather and traffic conditions. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your car covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. General notes The system may not be able to play audio CDs with copy protection. Playing copied CDs may cause malfunctions during playback. i The audio system plays both CD-Rs and CD-RWs with audio data. ! If you affix stickers to the CDs, they can become warped due to the heat that develops in the CD drive or CD changer. In certain situations, the CDs can then no longer be ejected and cause damage to the drive. Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ! Your CD drive or CD changer has been designed to play CDs which correspond to the EN 60908 standard. You can therefore only use CDs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm. If you insert thicker data carriers, e.g. ones that have data on both sides (one side with DVD data, the other side with audio data), they cannot be ejected and will damage the drive. 219 Controls in detail Audio system Do not use CDs with an 8 cm diameter, not even with a CD adapter. Attempting to play CDs with an 8 cm diameter or playing such CDs with an adapter may cause damage to the CD drive. Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Should excessively high or low temperatures occur while in CD changer mode*, CD TEMP will appear in the display, and the CD will be muted until the temperature has reached an acceptable level for the system to continue operation. Tips on handling CDs MP3 앫 Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during playback. The CD changer* can play audio CDs as well as CDs with MP3 files. 앫 Avoid scratches, fingerprints and dust on the CDs. Information on MP3 data carriers 앫 Do not write on CDs or apply any labels or other material to them. 앫 The single CD player and the CD changer* play audio CDs. Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially available cleaning cloth. Never wipe the CD in a circular motion; instead, wipe it in a straight line starting in the center and moving outward. Do not use solvents, anti-static sprays, etc. for cleaning. 앫 Replace the CD in its case after use. 앫 Protect CDs from heat and direct sunlight. i CD media, CD burning software and CD writers are available in great variety. Due to this variety, it cannot be guaranteed that the CD changer will be able to play every user-written CD. The burning process can lead to data errors and aging of the medium may result in data loss. Therefore, the CD changer may be restricted in its ability to play MP3 data carriers; it may play them with reduced sound quality, or it may not be able to play them at all. Problems may be encountered during playback of user-written CDs with a storage capacity of more than 700 MB. These CDs do not meet valid standards as of this printing. 220 Controls in detail Audio system Compatible MP3 data carriers Compatible bit and sampling rates Information on copyright The CD changer can read the following data carriers in MP3 mode: Fixed and variable bit rates of up to 320 kBit/s are possible. 앫 CD-DA 앫 CD-R The following table lists possible sampling rates: The music tracks that you create for use in MP3 mode or that you play in MP3 mode are subject to copyright laws under applicable international and national regulations. 앫 CD-RW Compatible file systems and compression methods Use Romeo or Joliet. Depending on file format used, up to 128 characters are possible. MPEG1 Audio Layer3 44.1 KHz, 48 KHz, 32 KHZ MPEG2 Audio Layer3 22.5 KHz, 24 KHz, 16 KHz MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3 11.025 KHz, 12 KHz, 8 KHz WMA 32 KHz, 44.1 KHz, 48 KHz The following compression methods are compatible: 앫 MP3 i 앫 WMA 앫 WAV Only use MP3 tracks with a bit rate of 128 kBit/s or higher and with the specified sampling rates. In many countries, the reproduction of copyrighted materials is not permitted, even if only for personal use, without the express prior consent of the copyright holder. Please check the current copyright laws for your country and comply with them. These restrictions do not apply, for example, to your own compositions and recordings, or for recordings for which authorization has been obtained from the copyright holder. The use of rates other than those specified may lead to noticeably inferior sound quality. 221 Controls in detail Audio system MP3 playback You can play an MP3 CD on the CD changer* as you would any standard audio CD. All of the functions described for the CD changer also apply for the playback of MP3 CDs. Keep in mind that the single CD player in the audio system unit is not able to read MP3 CDs. The first 99 tracks on the CD, including tracks in subdirectories, are recognized and played. Any additional tracks will not be played. i Due to the branched data structure, playback of the first track may be delayed slightly. 222 i Operating the single CD player in the audio system unit If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or cannot be read, WRONG CD0 will appear in the display. Loading a CD The single CD player in the audio system unit has capacity for one CD. The CD slot for loading the drive is located underneath the soft keys. 왘 Make sure the system is switched on. 왘 Insert CD into CD slot. The label side of the CD must face upwards. The system automatically pulls the CD into the CD slot. The audio CD begins to play. Ejecting a CD 왘 Make sure the system is switched on. 왘 Press g button. The system ejects the CD. Remove CD0 will appear in the display. 왘 Remove CD from slot. With the CD removed, NO CD will appear in the display. ! i If a CD is already loaded, it must be ejected before inserting a new CD. Inserting a second CD in the slot with another CD still loaded will cause damage to the CD drive not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. If you do not take the CD out of the CD slot within approx. 15 seconds, the system automatically pulls the CD back in and plays it. If a CD is pulled back in, press g button, the CD will then be ejected. Controls in detail Audio system Operational readiness of CD changer* If a CD changer has been installed in the vehicle, it can be operated from the front control panel of the audio system. The CD changer is located in the glove box. A light-emitting diode in the buttons shows the status of the corresponding magazine slot. Loading the CD magazine i If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or cannot be read, WRONG CD0 will appear in the display. CD loading slot 1 is above buttons 2 and is used to load CDs. LEDs no LED is lit Loading one or more CDs interrupts the CD playback. Magazine slot is empty. green LED flashes CD can be loaded. red LED is lit Magazine slot is in use. red LED flashes CD is being ejected. Loading single CDs 왘 Open the glove box. 1 CD loading slot 2 Magazine slot button A magazine is integrated into the CD changer as a fixed element. It holds a maximum of six CDs. The CD changer features six magazine slot buttons 2 for controlling the loading procedure. 1 CD loading slot 2 Magazine slot button 컄컄 223 Controls in detail Audio system 컄컄왘 Briefly press button 2 for the empty magazine slot that you would like to use. The light-emitting diode in the magazine slot button flashes in green. INSERT CD appears in the display along with the slot number. The flashing light indicates that the CD changer is ready to receive a CD. 왘 Insert an audio CD into CD loading slot 1 within 5 seconds, label side up. The CD is pulled in and played. 왘 Close the glove box. Loading several CDs 왘 Open the glove box. 왘 Press button 2 of an empty magazine slot for more than 2 seconds. The light-emitting diodes in all the magazine slot buttons light up several times in green, and ALL LOAD appears in the display. 224 왘 왘 Wait until the light-emitting diode for the first magazine slot flashes in green. 왘 Repeat the previous step until all six magazine slots are loaded. The flashing light indicates that the CD changer is ready to receive a CD. Once all magazine slots are loaded, the CD in the sixth magazine slot is played. Insert an audio CD into CD loading slot 1 within 5 seconds, label side up. i If, for example, you only want to load magazine slots 1 - 4 instead of all six, simply do not insert a fifth CD into the CD loading slot. The CD changer will first try to load a CD but will then cancel the procedure, after which the radio will play the fourth CD. The CD is pulled in and the light-emitting diode in the magazine slot button lights up in red. The magazine slot is loaded. The light-emitting diode in the next available magazine slot button flashes in green. The CD changer is ready to receive the next CD. 왘 Close the glove box. Controls in detail Audio system Ejecting CDs i The CD playback is interrupted while one or more CDs are being ejected. Ejecting single CDs 왘 Open the glove box. 왘 Briefly press desired magazine slot button. The light-emitting diode in the magazine slot button flashes in red. The corresponding CD is ejected. EJECTING CD appears in the display along with the magazine slot number. 왘 Remove CD from CD loading slot within 15 seconds. If after removing a single CD no other CDs remain loaded in the magazine, MAG. EMPTY appears in the display. i Ejecting all loaded CDs If you do not take the CD from the CD loading slot within 15 seconds, the CD changer will automatically pull the CD back in. The system will then play the CD. 왘 Open the glove box. 왘 Press the button of a loaded magazine slot for more than 2 seconds. The light-emitting diodes in all magazine slot buttons light up several times in red, and ALL EJECT appears in the display. If you are listening to a CD while ejecting another CD from the changer: The Audio system stops playing the CD while another CD is being ejected. Once the CD has been ejected, the Audio system will continue playing where it left off. 왘 The CD changer ejects the CDs one after another. The light-emitting diode for the magazine slot being emptied flashes in red. 왘 Close the glove box. Take corresponding CD from CD loading slot within 15 seconds. The ejection procedure is finished once you have removed all CDs from the CD loading slot or if the CD changer cancels the procedure. With all CDs removed from the magazine, MAG. EMPTY appears in the display. 225 컄컄 Controls in detail Audio system 컄컄 i 왘 Playing CDs If you do not take the CD from the CD loading slot within 15 seconds, the CD changer will automatically pull the CD back in. The system will then play the CD. 왘 With all CDs ejected, press the b button to switch back to the radio mode. The CD will resume playback at the point where it was switched off. Close the glove box. Single CD player in the audio unit Press i button. CD0 will appear in the upper left-hand corner of the display. CD changer* 왘 Press Q button. CD and the selected magazine slot number appear in the upper left-hand corner of the display. If you have not removed a CD since the last time the CD audio source was activated, the last CD listened to will begin to play at the point where it was switched off. After the last track on a CD has finished, the next CD is automatically played. 226 Playing tracks You have the following options: 앫 Audio system with CD changer*: selecting CDs 앫 Direct track entry 앫 Track skip forward/reverse 앫 Fast forward/reverse 앫 Scan 앫 Random tracks 앫 Repeat track Selecting CDs in the audio unit with CD changer* Controls in detail Audio system 왘 You can select from among the inserted CDs with buttons R to 6. Direct track entry 앫 Skipping tracks forward 왘 R = CD player in the audio unit 1 to 6 = CDs in the CD changer* Press H button briefly. The next track will be played. 앫 The magazine slot number of the selected CD appears next to CD in the display, and the number of the currently played track appears next to TRACK. 왘 Press * button. i 왘 Enter track number using buttons 1 to R. If there is no CD in the selected magazine slot, NO CD appears in the display with the corresponding slot number. Skipping tracks forward/backward Skipping tracks backward 왘 You can make a direct selection from among the tracks on a CD. The number of the track being played appears next to TRACK in the display. You can only enter available track numbers. Press G button briefly. If the track has been playing for more than 10 seconds, the unit skips back to the beginning of the track currently playing. If less than 10 seconds have been played, the unit skips back to the beginning of the previous track. Pressing the G or H button repeatedly will result in multiple tracks being skipped. 227 Controls in detail Audio system Fast forward/reverse Random play Repeat 앫 The random function (RDM) plays the tracks of the current CD in random order. The track being played is repeated until the repeat function is switched off. Fast forward 왘 앫 Press and hold H button until desired point has been reached. Reverse 왘 Press and hold G button until desired point has been reached. i 앫 The track number and the relative time of the track is shown in the display during the search. i i When you start the RDM function, the RPT function is automatically switched off. When you start the RPT function, the RDM function is automatically switched off. Switching on random 왘 앫 Starting scan 왘 Press SC soft key. SC will appear in the display. Each track on the current CD will be played for approx. 8 seconds in ascending order. 앫 Ending scan 왘 228 Press SC soft key or G or H. 앫 Switching off random 왘 Press RDM soft key again. Switching on repeat 왘 Press RDM soft key. RDM appears in the display. A randomly selected track is played. Scan 앫 Press RPT soft key. RPT appears in the display. 앫 Switching off repeat 왘 Press RPT soft key again. Controls in detail Audio system Pause function Track and time display The CD changer mode is interrupted by an incoming call on the telephone* (컄 page 235). 앫 GSM network phones Using your Mercedes-Benz specified mobile telephone*, a number of functions and operating steps can be performed and displayed in the audio system display. Switching on pause function 왘 Press T soft key. The number of the track being played and the elapsed playing time appear in the display. 왘 Press F button. 왘 The CD changer mode is interrupted and PAUSE appears in the display. 앫 Switching off pause function 왘 Press F button. The CD changer mode is active again. Press T soft key again. The total number of tracks and the total playing time of the CD appear in the display. 왘 Press T soft key. The standard CD playback menu appears in the display. 229 Controls in detail Audio system Warning! G A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone1 while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road, and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. 1 Observe all legal requirements. 230 Further operating instructions not covered here can be found in the operating instructions for the multifunction steering wheel and the cellular telephone*. Switching on the telephone Switching on the telephone 왘 If your audio system is set up for telephone operation, the t symbol will appear in the display. When you insert your Mercedes-Benz specified mobile telephone* into the telephone cradle, you will be prompted to enter your PIN for 30 seconds (컄 page 231). This display disappears when you press any button. When your mobile telephone* is inserted into the telephone cradle, you will see the reception strength in the upper right-hand corner of the display. Press h button. If the telephone was previously switched off, PROCESSING appears in the display and you will then be prompted to enter your PIN. Switching off the telephone 왘 Press h button for approx. 3 seconds. PROCESSING appears in the display until the telephone is off. Afterward, PHONE OFF appears in the display. Controls in detail Audio system i PIN entry If the PIN is entered incorrectly three times, NEED PUK will appear in the display. Enter PUK via your telephone. Please refer to the separate telephone operating instructions for more information. 왘 Enter PIN number using buttons 1 to R. 왘 If necessary, correct number entered with the CLR soft key. Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered; press soft key and hold to delete the complete number. i Press OK soft key after entering correct PIN. The volume can be adjusted separately for telephone mode and audio mode. 왘 왘 READY or ROAMING will display. appear in the Placing a call Entering a telephone number and starting the dialing process Adjusting the volume 왘 Turn rotary control ofEbutton during a telephone call. The volume will increase or decrease depending on the direction turned. 왘 Enter desired telephone number using buttons 1 to R. The number can have up to 32 digits, but only twelve of these are visible in the display. Adjusting sound 왘 Adjust sound during a telephone call. Sound adjustment (컄 page 207). 231 컄컄 Controls in detail Audio system 컄컄왘 왘 i If necessary, correct number entered with the CLR soft key. Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered; press soft key and hold to delete the complete number. This is only possible, however, when the call information transmitted includes the number of the person calling. If the telephone number is not transmitted, NO NUMBER will be stored in the phone book. After correct telephone number has been entered, press s button. i If the telephone number has been saved together with a name in the telephone book, the name will appear in the display. Phone book 앫 232 Press MEM soft key or press button ‚ or ƒ. 왘 Press desired numerical key 2 to 9. The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of the initial letters (e.g. for S -Schneider, press button 7 four times). Searching and calling up telephone book entries by name You can access your mobile telephone’s phone book using the audio system. You can access both the main entries and the sub-entries of your phone book. or 왘 Press and hold button ‚ or ƒ. The system jumps from one initial letter to the next in ascending or descending order. The numbers stored in the phone book of the telephone can be called up either by name or number. In addition, incoming calls are stored in the phone book. 왘 왘 or Press and hold button ‚ or ƒ until desired initial letter has been reached. Controls in detail Audio system 왘 왘 Press button ‚ or ƒ repeatedly until desired entry has been reached. The stored entries are selected in alphabetical order with the sub-entries. 앫 i Several sub-entries can be stored for each main entry (name). These entries are marked by a corresponding abbreviation that appears in the upper left-hand corner of the display. The following abbreviations for sub-entries are possible: CEL = Mobile phone HOM = Home WOR = Work FAX = Fax PAG = Pager TEL = Main When you have selected a number, press s button. 왘 Press MEM soft key or press button ‚ or ƒ. The call will be made. 왘 Press RCV soft key (received calls). The number of received calls and then the call last received appear briefly in the display. Viewing the telephone number of a telephone book entry 왘 Search for desired entry. 왘 Press NUM soft key. 왘 The telephone number of the phone book entry appears in the display. 앫 Select desired telephone number with button ‚ or ƒ. The letter R and the number of the memory position appear in the upper left-hand corner of the display. The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received. Returning calls received 왘 When you have selected a number, press s button. The call will be made. 233 Controls in detail Audio system 앫 Speed dial Redial If you have stored telephone numbers as speed dial numbers in your telephone, you can also enter these with buttons 1 to R on the radio head unit. If the number you have dialed is busy, you can again place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the redial function. 왘 Press desired button 1 to R briefly. 왘 Press s button. If you have activated the automatic redial function on your telephone, the number of the person being called is automatically redialed after a short waiting period if there is a busy signal. Refer to the separate operating instructions for the mobile telephone. Turbo dial If you have stored telephone numbers as turbo dial numbers in your telephone, you can also enter these with buttons 1 to R on the radio head unit. 왘 234 Press desired button 1 to R until the call is made. Press s button. The telephone number last dialed will appear in the display. 왘 i The call will be made. 앫 왘 Select desired telephone number with button ‚ or ƒ. The letter L and the number of the memory position appears in the left-hand corner of the display. The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received. 왘 When you have selected a number, press s button. The call will be made. 앫 Manual redial Controls in detail Audio system Accepting an incoming call Muting a call If the telephone is active in the background (reception symbol is visible in the display), the audio source is muted when an incoming call is received. A ringing tone can be heard and the caller’s telephone number, or the name under which the telephone number has been saved in the phone book, appears in the display. If the caller’s number is not transmitted with the call, CALL will appear in the display. It is possible to mute a call; the caller is then no longer able to hear you. 왘 Press s button. The call is accepted. 앫 Mute on 왘 Press MUT soft key. 왘 MIC MUTE will 앫 appear in the display. Mute off 왘 Press MUT soft key again. Talking with two callers at the same time If you wish to receive or place another call during an already active call, you can accept or place the second call and switch between the callers or combine them into one call. Note that the feature described here is dependent on availability from your mobile phone service provider. 앫 Terminating a call 왘 Press t button. The current call is terminated and the muted audio source becomes active again. Placing/accepting a second call 왘 Place new call by entering telephone number manually. 왘 Press s button. You are connected to the second caller; the first caller is kept on hold. or 왘 Press s button to accept a second call. 235 컄컄 Controls in detail Audio system 컄컄 앫 i You will be notified of the second call acoustically, but you will not see this in the display. You are connected with the second caller; the first caller is kept on hold. 앫 Switching between calls 왘 Press 2 and s buttons. Combining two calls 왘 TDMA or CDMA network phones Press 3 and s buttons. The calls are combined into one call. 앫 Warning! A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone1 while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road, and traffic conditions permit. Terminating a combined call 왘 Press t button. The connection to both callers is terminated. This switches between the calls. The non-active call is kept on hold. 앫 Terminating a call 왘 Press t button. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. The current call is terminated. You are again connected with the caller previously placed on hold. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. 1 236 G Observe all legal requirements. Controls in detail Audio system Using your Mercedes-Benz specified mobile telephone*, a number of functions and operating steps can be performed and displayed in the audio system display. Switching on the telephone 왘 Switching on the telephone 왘 Further operating instructions not covered here can be found in the operating instructions for the multifunction steering wheel and the mobile telephone*. The telephone is unlocked. If you have entered an incorrect code, you must enter the correct code. Press h button. If you have programmed an unlock code for the telephone, you must now enter the code. Switching off the telephone 왘 If your audio system is set up for telephone operation, the t symbol will appear in the display. When you insert your Mercedes-Benz specified mobile telephone* into the telephone cradle, you will be prompted to enter your PIN for 30 seconds (컄 page 237). This display disappears when you press any button. When your mobile telephone* is inserted into the telephone cradle, you will see the reception strength in the upper right-hand corner of the display. Press OK soft key after entering correct code. Press h button for approx. 3 seconds. PROCESSING appears in the display until the telephone is off. Afterward, PHONE OFF appears in the display. Adjusting the volume 왘 Enter code using buttons 1 to R. 왘 If necessary, correct number entered with the CLR soft key. Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered; press soft key and hold to delete the complete number. 왘 Turn rotary control ofEbutton during a telephone call. The volume will increase or decrease depending on the direction turned. i The volume can be adjusted separately for telephone mode and audio mode. 237 Controls in detail Audio system Adjusting sound 왘 왘 Adjust sound during a telephone call. Sound adjustment (컄 page 207). Placing a call 왘 Entering a telephone number and starting the dialing process i Phone book Enter desired telephone number using buttons 1 to R. The number can have up to 32 digits, but only twelve of these are visible in the display. 238 This is only possible, however, when the call information transmitted includes the number of the person calling. If the telephone number is not transmitted, NO NUMBER will be stored in the phone book. After correct telephone number has been entered, press s button. If the telephone number has been saved together with a name in the phone book, the name will appear in the display. 왘 i If necessary, correct number entered with the CLR soft key. Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered; press soft key and hold to delete the complete number. The numbers stored in the phone book of the mobile telephone can be called up either by name or number. In addition, incoming calls are stored in the phone book. 앫 Searching and calling up phone book entries by name You can access your mobile telephone’s phone book with the audio system. You can access both the main entries and the sub-entries of your phone book. Controls in detail Audio system 왘 Press MEM soft key or press button ‚ or ƒ. 왘 Press desired numerical key 2 to 9. The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of the initial letters (e.g. for S -Schneider, press button 7 four times). or 왘 Press and hold button ‚ or ƒ. The system jumps from one initial letter to the next in ascending or descending order. 왘 or Press and hold button ‚ or ƒ until desired initial letter has been reached. 왘 왘 Press button ‚ or ƒ repeatedly until desired entry has been reached. The stored entries are selected in alphabetical order with the sub-entries. The call will be made. 앫 i Several sub-entries can be stored for each main entry (name). These entries are marked by a corresponding abbreviation that appears in the upper left-hand corner of the display. The following abbreviations for sub-entries are possible: When you have selected a number, press s button. Viewing the telephone number of a phone book entry 왘 Search for desired entry. 왘 Press NUM soft key. The telephone number of the phone book entry appears in the display. 앫 Returning calls received CEL = Mobile phone HOM = Home WOR = Work FAX = Fax PAG = Pager TEL = Main 239 Controls in detail Audio system 왘 Press MEM soft key or press button ‚ or ƒ. 왘 Press RCV soft key (received calls). 앫 The number of received calls and then the call last received appear briefly in the display. 왘 Select desired telephone number with button ‚ or ƒ. The letter R and the number of the memory position appear in the upper left-hand corner of the display. The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received. 왘 When you have selected a number, press s button. The call will be made. Speed dial Redial If you have stored telephone numbers as speed dial numbers in your telephone, you can also enter these with buttons 1 to R on the radio unit. If the number you have dialed is busy, you can again place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the redial function. 왘 Press desired button 1 to R briefly. 왘 Press s button. If you have activated the automatic redial function on your mobile telephone, the number of the person being called is automatically redialed after a short waiting period if there is a busy signal. Refer to the separate operating instructions for the mobile telephone. The call will be made. 앫 Turbo dial If you have stored telephone numbers as turbo dial numbers in your telephone, you can also enter these with buttons 1 to R on the radio unit. 왘 240 i Press desired button 1 to R until the call is made. 앫 Manual redial Controls in detail Audio system 왘 왘 Press s button. Accepting an incoming call Muting a call The telephone number last dialed will appear in the display. If the telephone is active in the background (reception symbol is visible in the display), the audio source is muted when an incoming call is received. A ringing tone can be heard and the caller’s telephone number, or the name under which the telephone number has been saved in the telephone book, appears in the display. If the caller’s number is not relayed, CALL will appear in the display. It is possible to mute a call; the caller is then no longer able to hear you. Select desired telephone number with button ‚ or ƒ. The letter L and the number of the memory position appears in the left-hand corner of the display. The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received. 왘 When you have selected a number, press s button. The call will be made. 왘 Press s button. The call is accepted. 앫 Mute on 왘 Press MUT soft key. 왘 MIC MUTE will 앫 appear in the display. Mute off 왘 Press MUT soft key again. Terminating a call 왘 Press t button. The current call is terminated and the muted audio source becomes active again. 241 Controls in detail Audio system Accepting a second incoming call 앫 왘 If you receive another call during an already active call, you can accept the second call and switch between the two. 앫 Accepting a second call 왘 Place new call by entering telephone number manually. i You will be notified of the second call acoustically, but you will not see this in the display. You are connected to the second caller; the first caller is kept on hold. 242 Switching between calls Press s button. This switches between the calls. The non-active call is kept on hold. 앫 Terminating a call 왘 Press t button. The current call is terminated. The connection to the caller previously kept on hold is also interrupted; however, reconnection is indicated by an acoustic signal. Placing a second call If you wish to place another call during an already active call, you can place the second call and switch between the callers or combine them into one call. Note that this feature is dependent on availability from your mobile phone service provider. 앫 Placing a second call 왘 Place a new call by entering telephone number manually. 왘 Press s button. You are connected to the second caller; the first caller is kept on hold. Controls in detail Audio system 앫 Terminating a call 왘 Press t button. The current call is terminated. The connection to the caller previously kept on hold is also interrupted; however, reconnection is indicated by an acoustic signal. 앫 Combining two calls 왘 Press s button. The calls are combined into one call. 앫 Terminating a combined call 왘 Emergency calls “911” The following describes how to dial a “911” emergency call using the audio system head unit when a Mercedes-Benz specified mobile phone* is inserted in the phone cradle. Unless otherwise specified, the descriptions refer to the audio system head unit. Consult the separate telephone operating instructions that came with your mobile phone* for information on how to place a “911” emergency call on the mobile phone*. Press t button. The connection to both callers is terminated. The following conditions must be met for a “911” emergency call: Warning! G 앫 Telephone must be switched on. 앫 The corresponding mobile communications network must be available. i Emergency calls may not be possible with all telephone networks or if certain network services and/or telephone functions are active. Check with your local service providers. If you cannot make an emergency call, you will have to initiate rescue measures yourself. The “911” emergency call system is a public service. Using it without due cause is a criminal offense. 243 Controls in detail Audio system GSM network phones Placing a “911” emergency call using audio head unit with the phone locked 왘 Press h button to switch to telephone operation. Placing a “911” emergency call using audio head unit with the phone unlocked 왘 왘 PIN? appears in the audio display. 왘 Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit. 왘 Press OK soft key or s button for dialing to begin. DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection. 왘 Wait until the emergency call center answers, then describe the emergency. 244 왘 Press h button to switch to telephone operation. TDMA/CDMA network phones Placing a “911” emergency call using audio head unit with the phone locked 왘 Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit. Press s button for dialing to begin. CODE? appears in the audio display. 왘 Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit. 왘 Press OK soft key or s button for dialing to begin. DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection. 왘 Wait until the emergency call center answers, then describe the emergency. i If no SIM card is in the mobile phone, NO SERVICE appears in the audio display. In that case, you only can make an emergency call on the mobile phone itself, without the use of the head unit. Press h button to switch to telephone operation. DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection. 왘 Wait until the emergency call center answers, then describe the emergency. Controls in detail Audio system Placing a “911” emergency call using audio head unit with the phone unlocked 왘 Press h button to switch to telephone operation. 왘 Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit. 왘 Press s button for dialing to begin. DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection. 왘 Wait until the emergency call center answers, then describe the emergency. 245 Controls in detail Power windows Opening and closing the windows Warning! The windows are opened and closed eletrically. Switches for operating the driver and passenger door windows are located on the driver’s door. A switch for operating the passenger door window is located on the passenger door. The door windows can also be operated using the retractable hardtop switch (컄 page 248). The rear side windows can only be operated using the retractable hardtop switch (컄 page 248) or the SmartKey* (컄 page 249). 1 Left window 2 Right window 246 G When closing the windows, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was pressed past the resistance point and released, by pressing the respective switch. The door windows are equipped with the express-close and automatic reversal function. If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pressed the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the window, the automatic reversal function will stop the window and open it slightly. If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the window by pressing and holding the switch, by pressing and holding button ‹ on the SmartKey*, by pushing and holding the retractable hardtop switch, or by pressing and holding the , button on the climate control panel or automatic climate control* panel, the automatic reversal function will not operate. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Controls in detail Power windows i Opening the door windows You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey* (컄 page 249) or the retractable hardtop switch (컄 page 248). 왘 You can close and open the windows using the air recirculation switch , in the control panel of the climate control (컄 page 185) or the automatic climate control* (컄 page 199). i With the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the door windows can be operated: 왘 앫 until you open a door 앫 for at least 5 minutes Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). Press and hold switch 1 or 2 at the symbol k to the resistance point. Fully opening the door windows (Express-open) 왘 The corresponding window will move downwards until you release the switch. Press switch 1 or 2 at the symbol k past the resistance point and release. The corresponding window opens completely. Closing the door windows 왘 Press and hold switch 1 or 2 at the symbol j to the resistance point. The corresponding window will move upwards until you release the switch. Warning! G If you press and hold the switch when closing the window, and upward movement of the window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not operate. Fully closing the door windows (Express-close) 왘 Press switch 1 or 2 at the symbol j past the resistance point and release. The corresponding window closes completely. Warning! G Driver’s door only: If the switch is pressed again past the resistance point and released within 5 seconds, the automatic reversal will not operate. 컄컄 247 Controls in detail Power windows 컄컄 ! If the upward movement of the window is blocked during the closing procedure, the window will stop and open slightly. Remove the obstruction, press the respective switch at the symbol j again past the resistance point and release. Opening and closing the windows with the retractable hardtop switch All windows can be opened or closed with the retractable hardtop switch. The retractable hardtop switch is located on the lower part of the center console. If the window still does not close when there is no obstruction, press and hold the respective switch at the symbol j. The window will then close without the obstruction sensor function. Stopping windows during Express-operation 왘 Briefly press the respective switch at the symbol k or j again. 248 Warning! G Never operate the windows if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the retractable hardtop switch. If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the windows using the retractable hardtop switch, the automatic reversal function will not operate. Retractable hardtop switch 1 Opening all side windows 2 Closing all side windows 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). Controls in detail Power windows Opening Closing 왘 Push the retractable hardtop switch in quick succession twice in direction of arrow 1. 왘 All side windows open. 왘 i You can operate the rear side windows only by using the retractable hardtop switch. Push the retractable hardtop switch in quick succession twice in direction of arrow 2. Keep the retractable hardtop switch pushed the second time until all windows are closed. Opening and closing the windows with the SmartKey* The retractable hardtop (컄 page 252) will also be opened or closed when the power windows are operated with the SmartKey. The windows in the driver’s and passenger door will close first, followed by the rear side windows. i If the retractable hardtop is open, only the windows in the driver’s and passenger door will close. The rear side windows remain open. 왘 Aim transmitter eye at the outside driver’s or passenger door handle. The SmartKey must be in close proximity to the respective outside door handle. 249 Controls in detail Power windows Opening (Summer opening feature) Closing (Convenience closing feature) 왘 왘 Press and hold button Œ. The windows and retractable hardtop begin to open after approximately 1 second. In the multifunction display you will see the message Retractable roof in operation. 왘 Release button Œ on the SmartKey to interrupt procedure. 250 왘 Press and hold lock button ‹. Warning! G The windows and retractable hardtop begin to close after approximately 1 second. In the multifunction display you will see the message Retractable roof in operation. When closing the side windows and retractable hardtop, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. Release button ‹ on the SmartKey to interrupt procedure. 앫 If potential danger exists, proceed as follows: Release button ‹ to stop the closing procedure. To open, press and hold button Œ. To continue the closing procedure after making sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure, press and hold button ‹. Controls in detail Power windows Warning! G Synchronizing power windows The power windows must be synchronized If the retractable hardtop does not completely open or close, the roof hydraulics will lose pressure and the retractable hardtop is lowered 앫 after approximately 7 minutes when the ignition is switched on. 앫 after approximately 15 seconds when the ignition is switched off. 앫 앫 after the battery has been disconnected or discharged. if the power windows cannot be fully opened (Express-open) or closed (Express-close). Each power window must be synchronized. 왘 Close all doors. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). 왘 Press and hold both switches 1 and 2 at the symbol j until the windows are completely closed. 왘 Hold on to switches 1 and 2 for approximately 1 second. The power windows are synchronized. Shortly before the hardtop is lowered, a warning will sound. In the multifunction display you will see K and the message Retractable roof being opened. Properly lock the retractable hardtop (컄 page 255) before continuing to drive. 251 Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Opening and closing the retractable hardtop For safety reasons, the retractable hardtop can only be opened and closed when the vehicle is standing still. Warning! G Before operating the switch for the retractable hardtop, make sure no persons are injured by the moving parts (retractable hardtop, roof frame, and trunk lid). Hands must never be placed near the roof frame, upper windshield area, retractable hardtop, shelf behind roll bars, or trunk lid while the retractable hardtop is being raised or lowered. Serious personal injury may occur. If potential danger exists, release the retractable hardtop switch. This immediately interrupts the raising or lowering procedure. You can then operate the retractable hardtop switch to raise or lower the retractable hardtop away from the danger zone. 252 Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. ! When opening and closing the retractable hardtop, make sure 앫 there is sufficient clearance for the retractable hardtop to move up and the trunk lid to move back 앫 the cargo compartment cover is extended and closed 앫 the trunk is only loaded to the height of the cargo compartment cover 앫 the luggage/cargo does not push the closed cargo compartment cover up 앫 the trunk lid is closed 앫 no roof luggage carrier is installed 앫 the outside temperature is above +5°F (-15°C) ! Never sit or place heavy objects on the rear shelf. Doing so could cause damage to the retractable hardtop and the rear shelf. Otherwise the roof and other parts of the vehicle could be damaged. Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Cargo compartment cover Opening The cargo compartment cover is located in the trunk. 왘 왘 Press the release handle on the cargo compartment cover. Guide the cargo compartment cover forward to its end stop. ! To prevent damage to the retractable hardtop or luggage/cargo when lowering the roof: Cargo compartment cover 앫 Load trunk only to the height of the cargo compartment cover. 앫 Do not permit luggage/cargo to push up the closed cargo compartment cover. Closing 왘 Pull the cargo compartment cover at the handle in direction of the arrow until it engages on both sides at the trunk sill. 앫 Do not place anything on top or in front of the cargo compartment cover. 앫 Do not place anything on the shelf behind the roll bar. Retractable hardtop Warning! G To prevent possible accidents, drive the vehicle only with the retractable hardtop either completely closed and locked, or fully lowered into its storage compartment. i For safety reasons, the retractable hardtop cannot be opened or closed while driving. Make sure the retractable hardtop and the rear window are dry before you open it. Otherwise water may enter the interior and/or trunk. 253 Controls in detail Retractable hardtop i Before operating the retractable hardtop via the retractable hardtop switch, do the following first: 앫 Engage the parking brake (컄 page 59). 앫 Close the cargo compartment cover. 앫 Close the trunk lid. 앫 Switch on ignition (컄 page 36). The switch for opening/closing the retractable hardtop is on the lower part of the center console. 왘 Push and hold the retractable hardtop switch in direction of arrow 1 until the retractable hardtop is completely lowered into the trunk. Closing 왘 Retractable hardtop switch 1 Opening 2 Closing For operating the power windows with the retractable hardtop switch (컄 page 248). 254 Opening Push and hold the retractable hardtop switch in direction of arrow 2 until the retractable hardtop is completely closed and locked. Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Locking the retractable hardtop after raising/lowering Warning! G Be sure to keep the hardtop switch pushed until the hardtop is fully opened or closed. The hydraulic pump will then shut off. To prevent possible accidents, drive the vehicle only with the hardtop either completely closed and locked, or fully lowered into its storage compartment. Warning! G If the retractable hardtop does not completely open or close, the roof hydraulics will lose pressure and the retractable hardtop is lowered 앫 after approximately 7 minutes when the ignition is switched on. 앫 after approximately 15 seconds when the ignition is switched off. Shortly before the hardtop is lowered, a warning will sound. In the multifunction display you will see K and the message Retractable roof being opened. 앫 Warning! G The hardtop is not fully closed and locked or not fully opened and locked if: 앫 the message Retractable roof in operation is shown in the multifunction display 앫 a warning sounds for 10 seconds when driving and a message in the multifunction display appears (컄 page 381). If the retractable hardtop is not properly locked, lock it as described below. Properly lock the retractable hardtop before continuing to drive (컄 page 256). 255 Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Unlocked status noticed when stopped 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). 왘 To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully closed position, push the retractable hardtop switch forward until the retractable hardtop is fully closed. or: 왘 To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully opened position, push the retractable hardtop switch rearward until the retractable hardtop is fully open. 256 Unlocked status noticed while driving Warning! G Stop the vehicle and lock the retractable hardtop before continuing to drive. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. 왘 왘 Stop the vehicle and leave the ignition switched on. To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully closed position, push the retractable hardtop switch forward until the retractable hardtop is fully closed. or: 왘 To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully opened position, push the retractable hardtop switch rearward until the retractable hardtop is fully open. Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Opening (Summer opening feature) Opening and closing the retractable hardtop with the SmartKey* 왘 The power windows (컄 page 246) will also be opened or closed when you operate the retractable hardtop with the SmartKey. Warning! The retractable hardtop and windows begin to open after approximately 1 second. In the multifunction display you will see the message Retractable roof in operation. G Before operating the retractable hardtop, make sure no persons can be injured by the moving parts (retractable roof, roof frame, and trunk lid) due to negligence. Hands must never be placed near the roof frame, upper windshield area, hardtop, shelf behind roll bars, or trunk lid while the retractable hardtop is being raised or lowered. Serious personal injury may occur. Press and hold unlock button Œ until the retractable hardtop is completely open. 왘 Aim transmitter eye at the outside driver’s or passenger door handle. 왘 Release button Œ on the SmartKey to interrupt procedure. The SmartKey must be in close proximity to the respective outside door handle. If potential danger exists, release the respective button on the SmartKey. This immediately interrupts the raising or lowering procedure. You can then operate Œ or ‹ to raise or lower the hardtop away from the danger zone. 257 Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Closing (Convenience closing feature) 왘 Press and hold lock button ‹ until the retractable hardtop is fully closed. The retractable hardtop and windows begin to close after approximately 1 second. In the multifunction display you will see the message Retractable roof in operation. 왘 Release button ‹ on the SmartKey to interrupt procedure. Warning! G Warning! When closing the side windows and retractable hardtop, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. If the retractable hardtop does not completely open or close, the roof hydraulics will lose pressure and the retractable hardtop is lowered If potential danger exists, proceed as follows: 앫 after approximately 7 minutes when the ignition is switched on. 앫 앫 after approximately 15 seconds when the ignition is switched off. Release button ‹ to stop the closing procedure. To open, press and hold button Œ. To continue the closing procedure after making sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure, press and hold button‹. Shortly before the hardtop is lowered, a warning will sound. In the multifunction display you will see K and the message Retractable roof being opened. 앫 258 G Properly lock the retractable hardtop before continuing to drive (컄 page 256). Controls in detail Retractable hardtop i Wind screen Warning! Make sure the lower wind screen edging is inserted through the gap 5 between the storage compartment and the rear panel. G The wind screen can restrict the driver’s vision to the rear of the vehicle. To prevent a possible accident when visibility is limited (e.g. in darkness), the upper part of the wind screen should be folded back. 왘 Close snap fasteners 2 by pushing in handle cap 6. 왘 6 Handle cap Pull wind screen 1 on molding over roll bars. Installing Pull the wind screen edging, not on the netting itself. 왘 Remove wind screen 1 from its storage bag and unfold. The storage bag is located on the wall behind the seat backrests. 왘 1 Wind screen 2 Snap fastener (with handle cap) 3 Supporting strap 4 Fastening pin 5 Gap Attach supporting straps 3 to fastening pins 4. Removing 왘 Pull off wind screen 1 from roll bars. 왘 Open snap fasteners 2 by pulling out handle cap 6. 왘 Loosen supporting straps 3 from fastening pins 4. 왘 Fold wind screen 1 and put it back into storage bag. 259 Controls in detail Driving systems The driving system of your vehicle is described on the following pages: 앫 Cruise control, with which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed. The BAS, ABS and ESP® driving systems are described in the “Safety and Security” section (컄 page 82). Cruise control Warning! The cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle. Use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extended periods of time. You can set or resume cruise control at any speed over 20 mph (30 km/h). The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever. G The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must remain at all times responsible for the vehicle speed and for safe brake operation. Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic, and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed. 앫 The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed. 앫 The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control. 앫 Deactivate the cruise control when driving in fog. The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left-hand side of the steering column (컄 page 22). The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed. 260 Controls in detail Driving systems Warning! G Cruise control brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. The brake pedal is depressed automatically to do this. 1 Set current or higher speed 2 Set current or lower speed 3 Cancel cruise control 4 Resume to last set speed Keep in mind that cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must always remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed and for safe braking operation. Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with the braking ability of the cruise control system. Setting current speed 왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed. 왘 Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise control lever (컄 page 261). The current speed is set. 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The cruise control is activated. The selected speed appears in the multifunction display. Do not place your foot under the brake pedal - your foot could become caught. 261 Controls in detail Driving systems i i Canceling cruise control On uphill or downhill grades, the cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed. Once the grade eases, the set speed will be resumed. Vehicles with manual transmission: There are several ways to cancel the cruise control: On downhill grades, the cruise control maintains the set speed with braking from the vehicle’s braking system. In addition, on longer downhill grades the automatic transmission* will automatically downshift. If you depress the clutch pedal when shifting into another gear, the engine speed may increase. 왘 Step on the brake pedal. The cruise control is canceled. The last speed set is stored for later use. 앫 Drive with sufficient engine speed. 앫 Shift gears in a timely manner. or 앫 If possible, do not shift down more than one gear. 왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 261). The cruise control is canceled. The last speed set is stored for later use. i The last stored speed is canceled when you turn off the engine. 262 Controls in detail Driving systems i ! Setting a higher speed The cruise control switches off automatically, if 왘 Lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 261) and hold it up until the desired speed is reached. 왘 Release the cruise control lever. 앫 the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles with automatic transmission*: Moving gear selector lever to position N while driving also cancels cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to position N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads). 앫 ESP® is in operation or switched off with the ESP® switch (컄 page 84). i 앫 Vehicles with manual transmission: you depress the clutch pedal for longer than 6 seconds during shifting into another gear. Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate the cruise control. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise control will resume the last speed set. 앫 you step on the brake pedal. 앫 you pull up the parking brake lever firmly. 앫 Vehicles with automatic transmission*: you move the gear selector lever to position N while driving. The new speed is set. Setting a lower speed 왘 Depress the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 261) and hold it down until the desired speed is reached. 왘 Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is set. i When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the brake system will automatically brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently. 263 Controls in detail Driving systems Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments Faster 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 261). Slower 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 261). 264 왘 Setting to last stored speed (“Resume” function) Warning! The cruise control resumes the last set speed. G The speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others. Briefly pull the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 261). 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The last set speed appears in the multifunction display. Controls in detail Loading 왔 Loading Roof rack ! This vehicle is not designed to carry items on its roof. Roof rails and any roof-mounted devices, unless expressly approved by Mercedes-Benz for use on this vehicle model, must not be used as they will damage the vehicle and retractable hardtop. ! This vehicle is not designed to carry any items on its trunk lid or accommodate any type of trunk lid rack or device. Using such devices may damage the vehicle and retractable hardtop mechanism. At time of printing, Mercedes-Benz does not offer any roof racks or any other roof-mounted devices for use on this vehicle. 265 Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartments Warning! Glove box Storage compartment and telephone* compartment under armrest G To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not place anything on shelf behind the roll bars. Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects. Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown around and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident. i The glove box and the storage compartment under the armrest are centrally locked and unlocked. 266 1 Glove box lid release 2 Glove box 왘 왘 Pull glove box lid release 1 to open the glove box. 1 Armrest 2 Recess for opening storage and telephone* compartment The glove box lid opens downward. Storage compartment Push glove box lid 1 up until it engages to close the glove box. 왘 Reach into recess 2 on the left or right side and lift armrest 1 in direction of arrow to open the storage compartment. 왘 Lower armrest 1 until it engages to close storage compartment. i The CD changer* is located in the glove box. Controls in detail Useful features Telephone* compartment 왘 Reach into recess 2 on the left or right side, press in and fold up armrest to the right or left side to open it. Storage compartment between the seat backrests The compartment for the telephone* is opened. 왘 Parcel net in passenger footwell A small convenience parcel net is located in the passenger footwell and behind the driver’s seat. It is for small and light items, such as road maps, mail, etc. Warning! Fold armrest back until it engages to close the telephone* compartment. G Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects having sharp edges, in the parcel net. 1 Storage compartment lid release 2 Storage compartment 왘 Press storage compartment lid release 1 to open. In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants. The storage compartment lid opens downward. 왘 Push storage compartment lid up until it engages to close it. 267 Controls in detail Useful features Shelf behind roll bars Warning! Cup holder G The shelf behind the roll bars should not be used to carry objects. This will prevent such objects from being thrown around and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident or sudden maneuver. The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. Warning! G In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment, only use containers that fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may cause serious personal injury. Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. When not in use, keep the cup holder closed. An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup holder may come loose during hard braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 1 Cover plate 왘 Press briefly on cover plate 1 to open the cup holder. The cup holder opens automatically. 왘 268 Press cover plate 1 until the cup holder engages to close it. Controls in detail Useful features Ashtray Installing ashtray insert Removing ashtray insert Warning! G Remove front ashtray only with vehicle standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Move gear selector lever to position N (manual transmission: into second gear). With gear selector lever in position N (manual transmission: into second gear), turn off the engine. 왘 Place the ashtray insert into the retainer. 왘 Push the ashtray insert down into the retainer until it engages. 1 Cover plate 왘 Press cover plate 1 briefly in the direction of the arrow. The ashtray opens automatically. 왘 왘 Secure vehicle from movement by setting the parking brake. 왘 Move the selector lever to position N (manual transmission: second gear). To close the ashtray again, press cover plate 1 until the ashtray engages. Now you have more room to take out the ashtray insert. 왘 Open the ashtray. 왘 Reach into both recesses on the left and right side of the retainer and pull out the ashtray insert. 269 Controls in detail Useful features Cigarette lighter Warning! ! G Never touch the heating element or sides of the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the knob only. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 1 Cigarette lighter 왘 Cigarette lighter 1 will pop out automatically when hot. 왘 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). 270 Push in cigarette lighter 1. Reinsert cigarette lighter 1 in its socket after use. The lighter socket can be used to accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories (up to a maximum of 85 W) designed for use with the standard “cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind, however, that connecting accessories to the lighter socket (for example extensive connecting and disconnecting, or using plugs that do not fit properly) can damage the lighter socket. With the socket damaged, the lighter may no longer be able to be placed in the heating (pushed-in) position, or the lighter may pop out too early with the lighter not hot enough. To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC electrical assessories designed for use with the standard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the 12V power outlets (컄 page 271) in your vehicle whenever possible. Controls in detail Useful features Power outlet Floormat (driver’s side only) Installing Removing A power outlet 1 is located in the passenger footwell on the side panel of the center console. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). 왘 Flip up cover of power outlet 1 and insert electrical plug (cigarette lighter type). 왘 Pull floormat off of retainer pins 2 in direction of arrow 1. 왘 Remove the floormat. 왘 Lay down the floormat. 왘 Press the floormat eyelets 4 onto retainer pins 5 in direction of arrow 3. i The power outlet can be used to accommodate 12V DC electrical assessories (e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum of 180 W. 271 Controls in detail Useful features Warning! G Whenever you are using floormats, make sure there is enough clearance and the floormats are securely fastened. Floormats should always be securely fastened using eyelets 4 and retainer pins 5. Before driving off, check that the floormats are securely in place and adjust them if necessary. A loose floormat could slip and hinder proper functioning of the pedals. i For easier removing and installing the floormat, slide the driver’s seat fully backwards (컄 page 38). Telephone* Warning! Warning! G The external antenna must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on the installation of an approved external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operating instructions regarding use of an external antenna. 272 Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop the vehicle before placing or taking a telephone call. Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle. G If you choose to use the telephone1 while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. 1 Observe all legal requirements. Controls in detail Useful features Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System)* or audio system if road, weather, and traffic conditions permit. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. You can take and place telephone calls using the buttons s and t on the multifunction steering wheel. Use the control system for performing other telephone functions (컄 page 151). See separate operating manual for instructions on how to use the telephone. Tele Aid ! The Tele Aid system (Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand) The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the ¡ button. Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated. 앫 Automatic and manual emergency 앫 Roadside Assistance 앫 Information If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available. Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID and password. By visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid” (USA only), you will have access to account information, remote door unlock and more. The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response: The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted when using the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel. To raise, press button æ and to lower, press button ç or use the volume knob on your audio system or COMAND* head unit. 273 Controls in detail Useful features 왘 To activate, press the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button • or the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required. i The SOS button is located in the overhead control panel. The Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ are located below the center armrest cover. ! The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of these signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means. 274 i System self-check When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the audio system or COMAND* system audio is muted and the selected mode (radio, tape or CD) pauses. The optional cellular phone* (if installed) and inserted in cradle switches off. If you must use this phone, we recommend that you use it only with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. Remove the phone from the cradle and place the call. The COMAND* navigation system (if engaged) will continue to run. The display in the instrument cluster is available for use, and spoken commands are only available by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND* unit. A pop-up window will appear in the COMAND* display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress. After the Tele Aid call has ended, the optional cellular phone switches on again. A PIN entry might be necessary. Initially, after switching on ignition, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button •, and the Information button ¡ stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not come on). The message Malfunction. Drive to workshop appears for approximately 10 seconds in the multifunction display. Controls in detail Useful features Warning! G If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in the Roadside Assistance button, and/or in the Information button do not come on during the system self-check or if any of these indicators remain illuminated constantly in red and/or the message Malfunction. Drive to workshop is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self-check, a malfunction in the system has been detected. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Emergency calls An emergency call is initiated automatically following an accident in which the emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) or air bags deploy. An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then briefly pressing the button located under the cover. See (컄 page 276) for instructions on initiating an emergency call manually. Once the emergency call is in progress, the indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to flash. The message Connecting call appears in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted. When the connection is established, the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display. All information relevant to the emergency, such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification number and color are generated. A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated. The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the emergency provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle. The Tele Aid system is available if: 앫 it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services, connection and cellular air time. 앫 the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the Response Center. i Location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the Response Center. 275 Controls in detail Useful features Warning! G Initiating an emergency call manually Press SOS button 2 briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 flashes until the emergency call is concluded. If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds. 왘 Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center. 왘 Close cover 1 after the emergency call is concluded. Warning! Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means. 1 Cover 2 SOS button 왘 Briefly press on cover 1. The cover opens. 276 왘 G If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occupants. Controls in detail Useful features Roadside Assistance button • Located below the center armrest cover is the Roadside Assistance button •. 왘 Open center armrest cover (컄 page 266). 왘 Press and hold the button (for longer than 2 seconds). A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted. When the connection is established, the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals). A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established. 왘 Describe the nature of the need for assistance. The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such as labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more information. The following is only available in the USA: 앫 Sign and Drive services: Services such as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable. i The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button • remains illuminated in red for approx. 10 seconds during the system self-check after switching on ignition (together with the SOS button and the Information button ¡). See “System self-check” (컄 page 274) when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds. If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button • is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network was not available). The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display. 277 Controls in detail Useful features Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the button t on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the audio system or COMAND* head unit. Information button ¡ Located below the center armrest cover is the Information button ¡. 왘 Open center armrest cover (컄 page 266). 왘 Press and hold the button (for longer than 2 seconds). A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated. The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted. 278 When the connection is established, the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals). i A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be established. Information regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is available to you. See “System self-check” (컄 page 274) when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds. For more details concerning the Tele Aid system, please visit www.mbusa.com and use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only). The indicator lamp in the Information button ¡ remains illuminated in red for approx. 10 seconds during the system self-check after switching on ignition (together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button •). If the indicator lamp in the Information button ¡ is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display. Controls in detail Useful features Information calls can be terminated using the button t on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the audio system or COMAND* head unit. Call priority ! If other service calls such as a Roadside Assistance call or Information call are active, an Emergency call is still possible. In this case, the Emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls. If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset, contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada. ! i If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a malfunction or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit your Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possible. The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative, except Roadside Assistance and Information calls, which can also be terminated by pressing the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the audio system or COMAND* head unit. 279 Controls in detail Useful features Remote door unlock In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), and the reserve SmartKey is not handy: 왘 왘 The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature. i Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available. You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement. The SOS button will flash and the message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command. Then return to your vehicle and pull the trunk recessed handle for a minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing. The message Connecting call appears in the multifunction display. As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call. 280 Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center specialist may attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants. If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center, you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk handle again. Stolen Vehicle Recovery services In the event your vehicle was stolen: 왘 Report the incident to the police. The police will issue a numbered incident report. 왘 Pass this number on to the Mercedes-Benz Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service. The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location will only be provided to law enforcement. i When the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call is initiated automatically to the Response Center. See anti-theft alarm system (컄 page 87) and tow-away alarm (컄 page 88). Controls in detail Useful features Garage door opener* Warning! The integrated remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled devices. It provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held remote controls used to operate devices such as garage door openers, gate openers, or other devices compatible with HomeLink® or some other systems. Before the integrated remote control can be used, it must be programmed to the garage door opener, gate operator or other device you wish to operate. See the following instructions for programming information. Overhead control panel with integrated remote control 1 Indicator lamp 2 3 4 Signal transmitter button Needed for programming (not part of vehicle equipment): 5 Hand-held remote control of garage door opener, gate operator or other device 6 Hand-held remote control button G Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. When programming a garage door opener, the door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or closes. Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. 컄컄 281 Controls in detail Useful features 컄컄 When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming the integrated remote control. Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death. Programming the integrated remote control Step 1: 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). Step 2: Step 3: 왘 왘 If you have previously programmed an signal transmitter button and wish to retain its programming, proceed to step 3. If you are programming the integrated remote control for the first time, press and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4 and release them only when the indicator lamp 1 begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds (do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory. If you later wish to program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3. 282 Hold the end of the hand-held remote control 5 of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 in (5 to12 cm) away from the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be programmed, while keeping the indicator lamp 1 in view. Step 4: 왘 Using both hands, simultaneously press the hand-held remote control button 6 and the desired signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release the buttons until step 5 is completed. The indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. Controls in detail Useful features If the indicator lamp 1 stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the respective signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and released. i The indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the first time the signal transmitter button is programmed. If this button has already been programmed, the indicator lamp will only start flashing after 20 seconds. i If the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with the “rolling code” feature. Step 5: 왘 After the indicator lamp 1 changes from a slow to a rapidly flashing light, release the hand-held remote control button and the signal transmitter button. Step 6: 왘 Press and hold the just-trained signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and observe the indicator lamp 1. Step 7: 왘 To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3. Rolling code programming To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing the “Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier.) Step 8: 왘 Locate “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit. Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. Depending on manufacturer, the “training” button may also be referred to as “learn”or “smart” button. If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button, refer to the garage door opener operator’s manual. 컄컄 283 Controls in detail Useful features 컄컄Step 왘 9: Press the “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit. The “training light” is activated. You have 30 seconds to initiate the following step. i Gate operator/Canadian programming Some garage door openers (or other rolling code equipped devices) may require you to press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same signal transmitter button a third time to complete the training process. Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner. Step 10: 왘 Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Step 12: 왘 Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Step 11: Step 13: 왘 왘 Press, hold for 2 seconds and release same signal transmitter button a second time to complete the training process. 284 To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3. Controls in detail Useful features If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator (regardless of where you live) by using the programming procedures, replace step 4 with the following: Step 4: 왘 Press and hold the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release this button until it has been successfully trained. 왘 While still holding down the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4), “cycle” your hand-held remote control button 6 as follows: Press and hold button 6 for 2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds, and again press and hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this sequence on the hand-held remote control until the frequency signal has been learned. Upon successful training, the indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds. 왘 Proceed with programming step 5 and step 6 to complete. i Upon completion of programming the integrated remote control, make sure you retain the hand-held remote control that came with the garage door opener, gate operator or other device. You may need it for use in other vehicles, for future programming of an integrated remote control, or simply for continued use as a hand-held remote control to operate the respective device in other situations. Reprogramming a single signal transmitter button To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow these steps: 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). 왘 Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release the button. 왘 The indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the signal transmitter button, proceed with programming starting with step 3. 285 Controls in detail Useful features Operation of integrated remote control 왘 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). Select and press the appropriate integrated signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to activate the remote controlled device. The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed – up to 20 seconds. Erasing the integrated remote control memory 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). 왘 Simultaneously press and hold down the outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4, for approximately 20 seconds, until the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds. The codes of all three channels are erased. i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all three channels. 286 Programming tips If you are having difficulty programming the integrated remote control, here are some helpful tips: 앫 Check the frequency of the hand-held remote control 5 (typically located on the reverse side of the remote). The integrated remote control is compatible with radio-frequency devices operating between 288-399 MHz. 앫 Put a new battery in the hand-held remote control 5. This will increase the likelihood of the hand-held remote control sending a faster and more accurate signal to the integrated remote control. Controls in detail Useful features 앫 앫 앫 While performing step 3, hold the hand-held remote control 6 at different lengths and angles from the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you are programming. Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2 to 5 inches (5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at varying distances. If another hand-held remote control is available for the same device, try the programming steps again using that other hand-held remote control. Make sure new batteries are in the hand-held remote control before beginning the procedure. i i Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible with the integrated remote control. If you should experience further difficulties with programming the integrated remote control, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Straighten the antenna wire from the garage door opener assembly. This may help improve transmitting and/or receiving signals. 287 Controls in detail Useful features i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and Heated steering wheel* (SLK 280, SLK 350, Canada only) Switching on 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). The steering wheel heating warms up the leather area of the steering wheel. 왘 Turn switch at tip of lever in direction of arrow 1 and release it. The lever is on the lower left-hand side of the steering wheel. i (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. The steering wheel heating is temporarily suspended while indicator lamp 2 remains on when Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 1 Switching on 2 Indicator lamp 3 Switching off 288 The steering wheel is heated. Indicator lamp 2 comes on. 앫 the temperature of the vehicle interior is above 86°F (30°C) 앫 the temperature of the steering wheel is above 95°F (35°C) When these conditions do not apply anymore, steering wheel heating continues. Controls in detail Useful features Switching off 왘 Turn switch at tip of lever in direction of arrow 3 and release it. The steering wheel heating is switched off. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. i Indicator lamp 2 flashes or switches off in case of 앫 power surge or undervoltage 앫 steering wheel heating malfunction i The steering wheel heating switches off automatically when you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. 289 290 Operation The first 1000 miles (1500 km) Driving instructions At the gas station Engine compartment Tires and wheels Winter driving Maintenance Vehicle care 291 Operation The first 1000 miles (1500 km) In the “Operation” section you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle. The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later on. 앫 Drive your vehicle during the first 1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds. 앫 During this period, avoid heavy loads (full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm in each gear). 앫 Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever*. 앫 Shift gears in a timely manner. 앫 Avoid accelerating by kickdown. 앫 Select positions 3, 2, or 1 only when driving at moderate speeds (for hill driving). 앫 292 Select C as the preferred shift program (컄 page 163) for the first 1000 miles (1500 km). After 1000 miles (1500 km), you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds to the permissible maximum. ! Additional instructions for SLK 55 AMG: 앫 During the first 1000 miles (1500 km), do not exceed a speed of 85 mph (140 km/h). 앫 During this period, avoid engine speeds above 4500 rpm in each gear. All of the above instructions, as may apply to your vehicle type, also apply when driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after the engine or the rear differential has been replaced. i Always obey applicable speed limits. Operation Driving instructions 왔 Driving instructions Drive sensibly – save fuel Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions. To save fuel you should: 앫 Keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures. 앫 Remove unnecessary loads. 앫 Allow engine to warm up under low load use. 앫 Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration. 앫 Have all maintenance work performed at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet and as required by the maintenance service indicator. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Drinking and driving Warning! Pedals G Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. Warning! G Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement. Power assistance Warning! G With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on short trips and in hilly area. 293 Operation Driving instructions Brakes Warning! G After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components or salty road conditions, the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front. To help prevent brake disc corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces (particularly salted roads), it is advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking. The heat generated serves to dry the brakes. If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above-normal braking pressure at higher speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads. Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads. ! It can also result in the brakes overheating, thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident. Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System (BAS) (컄 page 83). 294 Be very careful not to endanger other road users when you apply the brakes. If the parking brake is released and the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low. Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir. Have the brake system inspected immediately. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by qualified technicians only. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Install only brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Operation Driving instructions Warning! G If other than recommended brake pads are installed, or other than recommended brake fluid is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired. This could result in an accident. High-performance brake system (SLK 55 AMG only) The high-performance brake system is designed to operate under the extremely high operating demands required to accommodate the performance capabilities of the vehicle. The brakes may produce a squeaking-type noise depending on the 앫 vehicle speed ! 앫 brake force applied When driving down long and steep grades, relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear. 앫 ambient conditions, e.g. temperature and humidity After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some time, rather than immediately park, so that the air stream will cool down the brakes faster. As with any brake system, the wear of individual brake system components such as brake pads or discs strongly depends on your driving style and the conditions under which you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving style calling for high demand braking will cause your vehicle’s brakes to wear more quickly. Warning! G New vehicle brake pads and discs, and replacement brake pads and discs may take several hundred miles of driving until they provide optimum braking efficiency. Until that time, you may need to use increased brake pedal pressure while braking. Please be aware of this and adjust your driving and braking accordingly during this break-in period. Excessive high demand braking will cause correspondingly high brake wear. Please be attentive to the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster and brake condition messages in the multifunction display. Especially for high performance driving, it is important to maintain the brake system and have it checked regularly. 295 Operation Driving instructions Driving off Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off. Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic. Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. When starting off on a slippery surface, do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP® switched off. Doing so may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear. 296 Parking Warning! G Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always: 앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal. 앫 Pull the parking brake lever up as many notches as possible. 앫 Move the selector lever to position P (manual transmission: first or reverse gear). 앫 Slowly release brake pedal. 앫 When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb. 앫 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. 앫 Take the SmartKey and lock vehicle when leaving. ! Set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition, place gear selector lever* in position P (manual transmission: move gearshift lever to first or reverse gear). In addition, when parking on hills, turn front wheel towards the road curb. Operation Driving instructions Tires Warning! The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread. G If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road. Inspect the tires and the vehicle undercarriage for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for repairs. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced. Warning! G Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3.0 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced. Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely. Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Hydroplaning Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain. Specified tire inflation pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires are subject to high loads (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures). 297 Operation Driving instructions Tire traction The safe speed on a wet, snow-covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road. You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point. Warning! G If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be substantially reduced. Under such weather conditions, drive, steer and brake with extreme caution. 298 Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires (컄 page 348) with a minimum tread depth of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the winter season to ensure normal balanced handling characteristics. On packed snow, they can reduce your stopping distance as compared with summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not covered with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution. ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Tire speed rating Regardless of the tire speed rating, local speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions. Warning! G Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires. Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury and possible death, for you and for others. Operation Driving instructions SLK 280, SLK 350 SLK 280 with Sport Package* SLK 350 with Sport Package* Your vehicle is factory equipped with “W”-rated tires, which have a tire speed rating of 168 mph (270 km/h). An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 155 mph (250 km/h). SLK 55 AMG Your vehicle is factory equipped with “Y”-rated tires, which have a tire speed rating of 186 mph (300 km/h). An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 155 mph (250 km/h). SLK 55 AMG with Performance Package* Your vehicle is factory equipped with “Y”-rated tires, which have a tire speed rating of 186 mph (300 km/h). An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 174 mph (280 km/h). i For information on speed rating for winter tires, see “Winter tires” (컄 page 348). For additional general information on tire speed markings on tire sidewall, see “Tire speed rating” (컄 page 334). Winter driving instructions The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration, braking and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions. When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, move gear selector lever* to position N or declutch in case of manual transmission. Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action. i For information on driving with snow chains, see “Snow chains” (컄 page 349). Warning! G On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss. 299 Operation Driving instructions Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal brake effect. Depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency back to normal. If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed. Warning! G Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers. Warning! G If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter the vehicle interior, resulting in unconsciousness and death. To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind. Warning! G The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. For more information, see “Winter driving” (컄 page 348). 300 Standing water ! Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth. Before driving through water, determine its depth. Never accelerate before driving into water. The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them. If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment. Water in these areas could cause damage to electrical components or wiring of the engine or transmission, or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake, causing severe internal engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Operation Driving instructions Control and operation of radio transmitter Passenger compartment Warning! G Warning! G COMAND*, radio, and telephone* Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible. Warning! In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. G Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely. Only operate the COMAND*, radio or telephone1 if road, traffic and weather conditions permit. The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. Driving abroad Abroad, there is an extensive Mercedes-Benz service network at your disposal. If you plan to drive into areas which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you should request pertinent information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Telephones and two-way radios 1 Observe all legal requirements. Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury. Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna. 301 Operation Driving instructions Catalytic converter Warning! Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with monolithic-type catalytic converters, an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet. ! To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle. Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be repaired promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter, causing it to overheat and potentially start a fire. 302 G As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. Emission control Certain engine systems serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law. These systems, of course, will function properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should therefore only be carried out by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians. Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover, the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the Maintenance Booklet. Operation Driving instructions Warning! G Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death. Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open at all times. Coolant temperature Warning! During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise to approx. 248°F (120°C). The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature over 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. i Excessive coolant temperature triggers a warning message in the multifunction display (컄 page 376). G 앫 Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids, which may have leaked into the engine compartment, to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. 앫 Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. 303 Operation At the gas station Refueling Warning! G Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish all smoking materials. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline! The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand side of the vehicle towards the rear. Locking and unlocking the vehicle with the remote control automatically locks and unlocks the fuel filler flap. Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON). Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump. For more information on gasoline, see “Premium unleaded gasoline” (컄 page 452) or the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet. Failure to remove the fuel cap slowly could result in personal injury. 1 To open fuel filler flap 2 To insert fuel filler cap 3 Supplemental tire inflation pressure information 304 i Operation At the gas station 왘 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. Open fuel filler flap by pushing at point indicated by arrow 1. The fuel filler flap springs open. 왘 Turn fuel filler cap counterclockwise and hold on to it until possible pressure is released. 왘 Take off fuel filler cap and set it in direction of arrow 2 in the recess on the inside of fuel filler flap. To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air, fully insert filler nozzle unit. 왘 Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill. Warning! G Check regularly and before a long trip Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas discharge. This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury. 왘 Replace the fuel filler cap by turning it clockwise until it audibly engages. 왘 Close the fuel filler flap. Engine compartment (SLK 350, example) i 1 Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system* reservoir 2 Brake fluid reservoir 3 Coolant expansion tank Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the ? malfunction indicator lamp (USA only) or the ± malfunction indicator lamp (Canada only) to illuminate. i For opening the hood, see “Hood” (컄 page 307). For more information, see “Practical hints” (컄 page 364). 305 Operation At the gas station Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system* For information on refilling the reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*” (컄 page 315). Brake fluid Coolant Vehicle lighting For normal replenishing, use water (potable water quality). Check function and cleanliness. For more information on coolant, see “Coolant” (컄 page 313) and “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.” (컄 page 449). ! Engine oil level If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem. For information on engine oil, see “Engine oil” (컄 page 308). For more information, see “Practical hints” (컄 page 363). For information on brake fluid, see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.” (컄 page 449). 306 For more information on vehicle lighting, see “Replacing bulbs” (컄 page 400). For information on switching on the exterior lighting, see “Exterior lamp switch” (컄 page 110). Tire inflation pressure For information on tire inflation pressure, see “Important notes on tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 328). Operation Engine compartment 왔 Engine compartment 왘 Hood Warning! G Pull hood lock release lever 1 in direction of arrow. The hood is unlocked. ! Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be forced open by passing air flow. To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are folded forward away from the windshield. Opening The hood release is located on the driver side under the instrument panel. 왘 With the hood released, lift the hood by lifting it at the front edge. The hood will be automatically held open at shoulder height by gas-filled struts. Warning! G To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running. Make sure the hood is properly closed before driving. When closing the hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers. The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay clear of fan blades. 컄컄 2 Lever for opening the hood 1 Hood lock release lever 왘 Push lever 2 on the hood upward to release hood. 307 Operation Engine compartment 컄컄 Warning! G If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature display in the multifunction display indicates that the engine is overheated, do not open the hood. Move away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled down. If necessary, call the fire department. Closing Warning! G The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition system 앫 with the engine running 앫 while starting the engine 앫 if ignition is “on” and the engine is turned manually 308 G Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone. 왘 왘 Warning! Engine oil The amount of oil your engine needs will depend on a number of factors, including driving style. Higher oil consumption can occur when 앫 the vehicle is new Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft (30 cm). 앫 the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds The hood will lock audibly. Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break-in period. Check to make sure the hood is fully closed. If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps, then it is not properly closed. Open it again and let it drop with somewhat greater force. i Do not use any special lubricant additives, as these may damage the drive assemblies. Using special additives not approved by Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. More information on this subject is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Operation Engine compartment Checking engine oil level with the control system (SLK 55 AMG only) When checking the oil level 앫 the vehicle must be parked on level ground. 앫 with the engine at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 5 minutes with the engine turned off. 앫 with the engine not at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 30 minutes with the engine turned off. To check the engine oil level via the multifunction display, do the following: 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). The standard display appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 128). 왘 Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the following message appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 124): 앫 Add 1.5 qts. (Canada: 1.5 liters) to reach max. oil level 앫 Add 2.0 qts. (Canada: 2.0 liters) to reach max. oil level i If you want to interrupt the checking procedure, press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel (컄 page 124). One of the following messages will subsequently appear in the multifunction display: 앫 앫 Engine oil level ok Add 1.0 qt. (Canada: 1.0 liter) to reach max. oil level 왘 If necessary, add engine oil. For adding engine oil, see “Adding engine oil” (컄 page 312). For more information on engine oil, see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.” (컄 page 449). 309 Operation Engine compartment Other display messages If you see the message: If the ignition is not switched on, the following message will appear: Engine oil level Not when engine on Turn on ignition to see engine oil level 왘 Turn off the engine. 왘 If the engine is at operating temperature, wait 5 minutes before checking oil. 왘 If the engine is not at operating temperature yet, you must wait 30 minutes before checking oil. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). If you see the message: Observe waiting time 왘 왘 If engine is at operating temperature, wait 5 minutes before repeating check procedure. If engine is not at operating temperature yet, you must wait 30 minutes before checking oil. 310 i If you want to interrupt the checking procedure, press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel (컄 page 124). If there is excess engine oil with the engine at normal operating temperature, the following message will appear: Engine oil level Reduce oil level 왘 Have excess oil siphoned or drained off. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. For more information on messages in the display concerning engine oil, see the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 368). Operation Engine compartment 왘 Checking engine oil level with the oil dipstick (SLK 280, SLK 350 only) When checking the oil level 앫 the vehicle must be parked on level ground. 앫 with the engine at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 5 minutes with the engine turned off. 앫 with the engine not at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 30 minutes with the engine turned off. Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after approximately 3 seconds to obtain accurate reading. The oil level is correct when it is between the lower (min) mark 3 and upper (max) mark 2 of oil dipstick 1. i 1 Oil dipstick 2 Upper (max) mark 3 Lower (min) mark To check the engine oil level with the oil dipstick, do the following: 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 307). 왘 Pull out oil dipstick 1. 왘 Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean. 왘 Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dipstick guide tube. The filling quantity between the upper and lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l). 왘 If necessary, add engine oil. For adding engine oil, see “Adding engine oil” (컄 page 312). For more information on engine oil, see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.” (컄 page 449). For more information on messages in the multifunction display concerning engine oil, see the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 368). 311 Operation Engine compartment Adding engine oil 왘 Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck. Only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio, or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Add engine oil as required. Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Be careful not to overfill with oil. Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water. ! 1 Filler cap 왘 Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck. For more information on engine oil, see “Technical data” (컄 page 449) and (컄 page 451). SLK 55 AMG 1 Filler cap 312 Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. SLK 350 (example) Operation Engine compartment Transmission fluid level* Coolant level Vehicles with automatic transmission*: The transmission fluid level does not need to be checked. If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the transmission. The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine must be cool. Warning! G 앫 Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately ½ turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure. 앫 Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. In order to avoid any possibly serious burns: 앫 Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated. 앫 Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if coolant temperature is above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to cool down before removing cap. The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure. 313 Operation Engine compartment The coolant expansion tank is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment. 왘 왘 Using a rag, turn cap 2 slowly approximately one half turn counterclockwise to release any excess pressure. Continue turning cap 2 counterclockwise and remove it. The coolant level is correct if the level SLK 350 (example) 1 Coolant expansion tank 2 Cap 3 Marking bar in the expansion tank 314 앫 for cold coolant: reaches marking bar 3 in expansion tank 1 앫 for warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher 왘 Add coolant as required. 왘 Replace and tighten cap 2. For more information on coolant, see “Coolants” (컄 page 453). Battery Your vehicle’s battery is located in the engine compartment. The battery should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve its rated service life. Refer to the Maintenance Booklet for battery maintenance intervals. If you use your vehicle mostly for short-distance trips, you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently. When replacing the battery, always use batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz. If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about steps you need to observe. Operation Engine compartment G Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries. A flames or sparks away from battery. Do not smoke. D Keep Risk of explosion acid is caustic. Do not allow it to come into contact B Battery with skin, eyes or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with clean water and seek medical help if necessary. E C Keep children away. the instructions in this Operator's Manual. F Follow Wear eye protection. Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system* The windshield washer reservoir is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment. Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. SLK 350 (example) 1 Washer fluid reservoir cap Fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system* is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir. It has a capacity of approx. 7.4 US qt (7 l). 315 Operation Engine compartment During all seasons, add MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix the windshield washer fluid in a suitable container. Warning! 왘 Pull cap upward using latch until it opens. 왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water (or commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures). G Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned. Always use washer solvent/antifreeze where temperatures may fall below freezing point. Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system/reservoir. 왘 316 Push cap down until it engages. ! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. For more information, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*” (컄 page 456). Operation Tires and wheels 왔 Tires and wheels See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation. They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase. Warning! G Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted: 앫 The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged. 앫 The operating clearance of the wheels and the tires may no longer be correct. Warning! G Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them. When replacing rims, only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and may lead to an accident. Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be recognized on retreads. Mercedes-Benz therefore cannot assure the operating safety of the vehicle when such tires are used. Important guidelines 앫 Only use sets of tires and rims of the same type and make. 앫 Tires must be of the correct size for the rim. 앫 Break in new tires for approximately 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds. 앫 Regularly check the tires and rims for damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire inflation pressure loss or damage the tire beads. 앫 If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire inflation pressure and correct as required. 앫 Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under 1/8 in (3 mm). 앫 When replacing individual tires, you should mount new tires on the front wheels first (on vehicles with same-sized wheels all around). 317 Operation Tires and wheels Tire care and maintenance Warning! G Regularly check the tires for damage. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them. Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month. For more information on checking tire inflation pressure, see “Recommended tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 327). 318 Tire inspection Life of tire Every time you check your tire inflation pressure, you should also inspect your tires for the following: The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to: 앫 excessive treadwear (컄 page 319) 앫 cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber 앫 bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the tread or side of the tire Replace the tire if you find any of the above conditions. Make sure you also inspect the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation. Spare tires will age and become worn over time even if never used, and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary. 앫 Driving style 앫 Tire inflation pressure 앫 Distance driven Warning! G Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Operation Tires and wheels Tread depth Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under 1⁄ in (3 mm). 8 Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced. to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced. Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely. Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm) 앫 Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm) Warning! ! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and gasoline. Cleaning tires ! Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire. Recommended minimum tire tread depth: 앫 Storing tires Always replace a damaged tire. G Although the applicable federal motor safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires 1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator) The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread. 319 Operation Tires and wheels Direction of rotation Loading the vehicle Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified. Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry. An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of rotation (spinning) of the tire. i Spare wheels may be mounted against the direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidirectional tire for temporary use only until the regular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced. Always observe and follow applicable temporary use restrictions and speed limitations indicated on the spare wheel. 320 앫 The Tire and Loading Information placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B) can be found on the driver’s door B-pillar. This placard tells you important information about the number of people that can be in the vehicle and the total weight that can be carried in the vehicle. It also contains information on the proper size and recommended tire inflation pressures for the original equipment tires on your vehicle. 앫 The Certification label, also found on the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. The Certification label also tells you about the front and rear axle weight capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for either the front axle or rear axle. Operation Tires and wheels i Tire and Loading Information Warning! 1 Driver’s door B-pillar Following is a discussion on how to work with the information contained on the two placards with regards to loading your vehicle. G Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure. Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only. Load limit data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle. Placard (Example A) Your vehicle is equipped with either the Tire and Loading Information placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B). 1 Load limit information on the Tire and Loading Information placard The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar. If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and 321 Operation Tires and wheels Loading Information placard (Example A), locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.” on this placard. The combined weight of all occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced in that statement. Placard (Example B) 1 Load limit information on the Vehicle Tire Information placard 322 The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar. If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B), locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity Weight” on this placard. The combined weight of all occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue (if applicable) should never exceed the weight listed next to vehicle capacity weight. Seating capacity The seating capacity gives you important information on the number of occupants that can be in the vehicle. Your vehicle is equipped with either placard Example A or placard Example B located on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 321). i Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only. Seating data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle. Operation Tires and wheels Steps for determining correct load limit Step 3 The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”. 왘 Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard Example A) 왘 Placard (Example A) 1 Seating capacity Step 4 왘 Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400-750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs). Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard Example B) Step 5 왘 왘 Locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity Weight” on your vehicle’s placard. Step 2 왘 Placard (Example B) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. 컄컄 1 Seating capacity 323 Operation Tires and wheels 컄컄Step 왘 6 (if applicable) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle (컄 page 326). The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle’s placard (컄 page 321). 324 Operation Tires and wheels Example Combined weight limit of occupants and cargo from placard Number of Seating occupants configura(driver and tion passengers) Occupants weight Combined Available cargo/luggage and trailer weight of all tongue weight (total load limit or occupants vehicle capacity weight from placard minus combined weight of all occupants) 1 1500 lbs 2 2 Occupant 1: 150 lbs Occupant 2: 180 lbs 330 lbs 1500 lbs - 330 lbs = 1170 lbs 2 1500 lbs 1 1 Occupant 1: 200 lbs 200 lbs 1500 lbs - 200 lbs = 1300 lbs 3 1500 lbs 1 1 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 150 lbs 1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs The higher the weight of all occupants, the less cargo and luggage load capacity is available. For more information, see “Trailer tongue load” (컄 page 326). 325 Operation Tires and wheels Certification label Even after careful determination of the combined weight of all occupants, cargo and the trailer tongue load (if applicable) (컄 page 326) as to not exceed the permissible load limit, you must make sure that your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR from the Certification label. The Certification Label can be found on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 321). 326 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo, and the trailer tongue load (컄 page 326) must never exceed the GVWR. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). To assure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible weight limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle), have the loaded vehicle (including driver, passengers and all cargo and, if applicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable commercial scale. Trailer tongue load The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is towed, the tongue load must be added to the weight of all occupants riding and any cargo you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue load typically is ten percent of the trailer weight and everything loaded in it. Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailer towing with your vehicle. Operation Tires and wheels Recommended tire inflation pressure Warning! G Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Your vehicle is equipped with either the Tire and Loading Information placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B) located on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 321). The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than one mile (1.6 km). Placard (Example A) Follow recommended cold tire inflation pressures listed on placard. Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best handling, tread life and riding comfort. In addition to the tire placard on the driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel filler flap for any additional information pertaining to special driving situations. For more information, see “Important notes on tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 328). i 1 Tire and Loading Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures Placard (Example A) lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment. Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only. Tire data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle. 327 Operation Tires and wheels Placard (Example B) Important notes on tire inflation pressure Warning! G If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly drops: 1 Vehicle Tire Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures Placard (Example B) lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment. i Placard (Example B) may list recommended cold tire inflation pressures for different vehicle loads. 328 앫 Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects. 앫 Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim. Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure are also increased while driving, depending on the driving speed and the tire load. If you will be driving your vehicle at high speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal and conditions allow, consult the placard on the inside of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can build up and result in sudden tire failure. Be sure to readjust the tire inflation pressure for normal driving speeds. You should wait until the tires are cold before adjusting the tire inflation pressure. Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure information for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Tire inflation pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire inflation pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature. Operation Tires and wheels Checking tire inflation pressure Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month. Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If you check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are warm (the vehicle has been driven for several miles or sitting less than 3 hours), the reading will be approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let air out to match the specified cold tire inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be underinflated. Checking tire inflation pressure manually Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire inflation pressure: 왘 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire. 왘 Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve. 왘 Read tire inflation pressure on tire gauge and check against the recommended tire inflation pressure on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 327). If necessary, add air to achieve the recommended tire inflation pressure. i If you have overfilled the tire, release tire inflation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge. 왘 Install the valve cap. 왘 Repeat this procedure for each tire. Run Flat Indicator* While the vehicle is being driven, the Run Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each wheel’s rotational speed. This allows the system to detect a significant loss of pressure in a tire. If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due to falling tire inflation pressure, you will see a corresponding warning message in the multifunction display. The Run Flat Indicator may function in a restricted manner or with a delay if: 앫 snow chains are mounted to the vehicle 앫 winter road conditions prevail 앫 you are driving on a loose surface (e.g. sand or gravel) 앫 you are driving in a very sporty manner (involving rapid acceleration or high speeds in curves) 329 Operation Tires and wheels Warning! G When the multifunction display shows the message Low pressure mode Check tires max. Speed 50 mph, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper tire inflation pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended tire inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and owner’s manual. 330 i The recommended tire inflation pressures for your vehicle can be found on the tire placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 321). The tire inflation pressures are not listed in the owner’s manual. Warning! G The Run Flat Indicator does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected tire inflation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or fuel filler flap. The Run Flat Indicator does not replace regular checks of the tire inflation pressures since a gradual pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected by the Run Flat Indicator. The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers. Operation Tires and wheels Warning! G Follow recommend tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator 왘 The tire inflation pressure monitor must be reactivated in the following situations: 앫 If you have changed the tire inflation pressure 앫 If you have replaced the wheels or tires 앫 If you have installed new wheels or tires 왘 Using the tire placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is correct. Warning! Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). The standard display menu appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 128). 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly until the following message appears in the multifunction display: Run Flat Indicator active Reactivation poss.: + 왘 Press button æ. The following message will appear in the multifunction display: Tire pres. now OK? G The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in a reliable manner if you have set the correct tire inflation pressures for each tire. If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set, the system will monitor the pressure according to the incorrect value. 331 Operation Tires and wheels If you wish to confirm activation: 왘 Press button æ. The following message will appear in the multifunction display: Run Flat Indicator reactivated After a certain “learning phase”, the Run Flat Indicator checks the set pressure values for all four tires. If you wish to cancel activation: 왘 Press button ç. Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires Overinflated tire inflation pressure Underinflated tire inflation pressure 앫 adversely affect handling characteristics 앫 cause uneven tire wear 앫 be more prone to damage from road hazards 앫 adversely affect ride comfort 앫 increase stopping distance Underinflated tires can: 앫 cause excessive and uneven tire wear 앫 adversely affect fuel economy 앫 lead to tire failure from being overheated 앫 adversely affect handling characteristics Warning! or 왘 Overinflated tires can: Wait until the message Tire pres. now OK? disappears. Warning! G Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. 332 G Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Operation Tires and wheels MOExtended system* Warning! The MOExtended system allows you to continue driving your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. You may only use the MOExtended system in conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator*. ! The maximum distance in emergency mode depends on the vehicle’s load. It is 30 miles (50 km) if the vehicle is partially loaded and 18 miles (30 km) if the vehicle is fully loaded. The point at which the maximum driving distance begins in emergency mode is when the warning message appears in the multifunction display indicating that there is a loss of tire inflation pressure. Do not exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). G In emergency mode, your vehicle’s driving characteristics are diminished in such situations as: Do not continue driving in emergency mode if 앫 you notice knocking sounds 앫 the vehicle starts to shake 앫 smoke develops and you smell rubber 앫 driving around curves 앫 ESP® is intervening continuously 앫 while braking 앫 you notice tears on the tire sidewalls 앫 while accelerating rapidly Therefore, your driving style must be adapted accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, as well as driving over obstacles (road curbs, potholes, or off-road areas). This is especially important if the vehicle is heavily loaded. The emergency driving distance that can be achieved greatly depends on the demands placed on the vehicle. Depending on speed, load, driving maneuvers, road conditions, outside temperature, etc., the distance can be significantly shorter or, if the vehicle is driven cautiously, somewhat longer. After driving in emergency mode, you must have the rims inspected by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to check if they are suitable for further use. The failed tire must be replaced in any case. i When replacing individual or all tires on the vehicle, make sure only tires marked with “MOExtended” are mounted in the size specified for your vehicle (컄 page 439). 333 Operation Tires and wheels Tire labeling Besides tire name (sales designation) and manufacturer name, a number of markings can be found on a tire. Following are some explanations for the markings on your vehicle’s tires: 1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards (컄 page 341) 2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) (컄 page 339) 3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 340) 4 Maximum tire inflation pressure (컄 page 341) 5 Manufacturer 6 Tire ply material (컄 page 343) 7 Tire size designation, load and speed rating (컄 page 334) 8 Load identification (컄 page 338) 9 Tire name i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. For more information, see “Rims and tires” (컄 page 439). 334 Tire size designation, load and speed rating 1 Tire width 2 Aspect ratio in % 3 Radial tire code 4 Rim diameter 5 Tire load rating 6 Tire speed rating i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. Operation Tires and wheels General: Tire width Rim diameter Depending on the design standards used, the tire size molded into the sidewall may have no letter or a letter preceding the tire size designation. The tire width 1 (컄 page 334) indicates the nominal tire width in mm. The rim diameter 4 (컄 page 334) is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is indicated in inches (in). No letter preceding the size designation (as illustrated above): Passenger car tire based on European design standards. The aspect ratio 2 (컄 page 334) is the dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width and is expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing section height by section width. Letter “P” preceding the size designation: Passenger car tire based on U.S. design standards. Letter “LT” preceding the size designation: Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards. Letter “T” preceding the size designation: Temporary spare tires which are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Aspect ratio Tire code The tire code 3 (컄 page 334) indicates the tire construction type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction. Tire load rating The tire load rating 5 (컄 page 334) is a numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support. For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs (615 kg) the tire is designed to support. See also “Maximum tire load” (컄 page 340) where the maximum load associated with the load index is indicated in kilograms and lbs. At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For additional information, see “Tire speed rating” (컄 page 336). 335 Operation Tires and wheels Warning! G The tire load rating must always be at least half of the GAWR (컄 page 344) of your vehicle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result which may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury to you or others. Always replace rims and tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part. Warning! G Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure. 336 For additional information on tire load rating, see “Load identification” (컄 page 338). i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 334) and Tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 334) are also referred to as “service description”. Tire speed rating The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 334) indicates the approved maximum speed for the tire. Warning! G Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires. Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury and possible death, for you and for others. i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 334) and Tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 334) are also referred to as “service description”. Operation Tires and wheels Summer tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) (Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h) 앫 At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the maximum speed capability of the tire, the service description for the tire must be referred to. The service description is comprised of the tire load rating 5 (컄 page 334) and the tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 334). If your tire includes “ZR” in the size designation and no service description 5 and 6 (컄 page 334) is given, the tire manufacturer must be consulted for the maximum speed capability. 앫 Any tire with a speed capability above 186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR” in the size designation AND the service description must be placed in parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in parenthesis designates the maximum speed capability of the tire as being above 186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual maximum permissible speed of the tire. If a service description 5 and 6 (컄 page 334) is given, the speed capability is limited by the speed symbol in the service description. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y” is the service description. The letter “Y” designates the speed rating and the speed capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). 337 Operation Tires and wheels All-season and winter tires Index Speed rating Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) 1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) H M+S V 1 Load identification No specification given: absence of any text (like in above example) indicates a standard load (SL) tire. XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load (or reinforced) tire. or M+S.for winter tires. Light Load: designates a light load tire. i Not all M+S rated tires provide special winter performance. Make sure the tires you use show M+S and the mountain/snowflake.marking on the tire sidewall. These tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions. 338 In addition to tire load rating, special load information may be molded into the tire sidewall following the letter designating the tire speed rating 1 (컄 page 338). 1 Load identification i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. C, D, E: designates load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure. Operation Tires and wheels DOT (Department of Transportation) DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) A tire branding symbol 1 (컄 page 339) which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. U.S. tire regulations require each new tire manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced. The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchasers the means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”, and “Date of manufacture”. Manufacturer’s identification mark 1 DOT 2 Manufacturer’s identification mark 3 Tire size 4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire manufacturer) 5 Date of manufacture The manufacturer’s identification mark 2 (컄 page 339) denotes the tire manufacturer. New tires have a mark with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a mark with four symbols. For more information on retreaded tires, see (컄 page 317). i Tire size For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. The code 3 (컄 page 339) indicates the tire size. 339 Operation Tires and wheels Tire type code Maximum tire load Warning! The code 4 (컄 page 339) may, at the option of the manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code for identifying significant characteristics of the tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure. Date of manufacture The date of manufacture 5 (컄 page 339) identifies the week and year of manufacture. The first two figures identify the week, starting with “01” to represent the first full week of the calendar year. The second two figures represent the year. For example, “3202” represents the 32nd week of 2002. 1 Maximum tire load rating i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. The maximum tire load is the maximum weight the tires are designed to support. 340 G For more information on tire load rating (컄 page 335). For information on calculating total and cargo load capacities (컄 page 323). Operation Tires and wheels Maximum tire inflation pressure Always follow the recommended tire inflation pressure (컄 page 327) for proper tire inflation. Warning! G Never exceed the max. tire inflation pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. 1 Maximum permissible tire inflation pressure i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. This is the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure for the tire. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (U.S. vehicles) Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction and temperature resistance. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. 1 Treadwear 2 Traction 3 Temperature resistance i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. 341 Operation Tires and wheels Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear Traction Temperature 200 AA A All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. 342 Treadwear Traction The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning! G The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Operation Tires and wheels Temperature The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning! G Tire ply material The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. 1 Plies in sidewall 2 Plies under tread i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. This marking tells you about the type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread. 343 Operation Tires and wheels Tire and loading terminology Accessory weight The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not). Bar DOT (Department of Transportation) Another metric unit for air pressure. There are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar. A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. Cold tire inflation pressure Air pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa), or bars. Aspect ratio Dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width expressed in percentage. 344 Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than one mile (1.6 km). Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and additional optional equipment, but without passengers and cargo. The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, passengers and cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue load. The GWV must never exceed the GWVR indicated on the certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Operation Tires and wheels GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) Maximum tire inflation pressure PSI (Pounds per square inch) This is the maximum permissible vehicle weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all options, passengers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue load). It is indicated on certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under normal driving conditions. A standard unit of measure for air pressure -> bar, kilopascal (kPa). Kilopascal (kPa) The metric unit for air pressure. There are 6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air pressure is bars. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar. Maximum load rating The maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity weight and production options weight. Recommended tire inflation pressure Normal occupant weight The number of occupants the vehicle is designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs). Recommended tire inflation pressure listed on placard located on driver’s door B-pillar for normal driving conditions. Provides best handling, tread life and riding comfort. Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions. Production options weight The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim. Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. 345 Operation Tires and wheels TIN (Tire Identification Number) Tire speed rating Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchases the means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”, and “Date of manufacture”. Part of tire designation; indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved. A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. Tire load rating The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. Numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support. Tire ply composition and material used This indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. 346 Traction Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires. The amount of grip provided. Tread Treadwear indicators Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars” that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread remains. Vehicle capacity weight Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity. Vehicle maximum load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing it by two. Operation Tires and wheels Rotating tires Warning! G Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires are of the same dimension. If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible. Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all around. If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the same dimension all around, tires can be rotated, observing a front-to-rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation (spinning) direction of the tire (컄 page 320). In some cases, such as when your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible. If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configuration, tires can be rotated according to the tire manufacturer’s recommended intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty pamphlet located in your vehicle literature portfolio. If none is available, tires should be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation (spinning) direction must be maintained (컄 page 320). Rotate tires before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear on front tires and tread center wear on rear tires). Warning! G Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a torque of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm). Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims. For information on wheel change, see the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 388) and (컄 page 408). Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels and brake discs, i.e. the inner side of the wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for and ensure proper tire inflation pressure. 347 Operation Winter driving Before the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterized at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. This service includes: 앫 Checking anticorrosion and antifreeze concentration. 앫 Adding of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windshield and headlamp cleaning* system. Add MB Concentrate “S” to a pre-mixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze which is formulated for temperatures below freezing point (컄 page 456). 앫 Battery test. Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature. A well charged battery helps to make sure the engine can be started, even at low ambient temperatures. 앫 Tire change. 348 ! When scraping ice or snow from the rear window, be careful not to damage the sealing strip or apertures along the side of the window. Winter tires Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires provide special winter performance. Make sure the tires you use show M+S and the mountain/snowflake.marking on the tire sidewall. These tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions. Using winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and ESP® in winter operation. For safe handling, make sure all mounted winter tires are of the same make and have the same tread design. Warning! G Winter tires with a tread depth under 1/6 in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no longer suitable for winter operation. Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires mounted to your vehicle. If the maximum speed for which your tires are rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver. Such notices are available at your tire dealer or any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Operation Winter driving Warning! G If you use your spare tire when winter tires are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that the difference in tire characteristics may very well impair turning stability and that overall driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Snow chains Snow chains should only be driven on snow-covered roads at speeds not higher than 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow. i When driving with snow chains, you may wish to deactivate the ESP® (컄 page 85) before setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve the vehicle’s traction. Have the spare tire replaced with a winter tire at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 앫 Only use snow chains that are approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to advise you on this subject. 앫 Use of snow chains may be prohibited depending on location. Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains. ! Please observe the following guidelines when using snow chains: Some tire sizes do not leave adequate clearance for snow chains. To help avoid serious damage to your vehicle or tires, use of snow chains is not permitted with the collapsible tire and MOExtended tires in general, and/or the following tire sizes: 앫 Use of snow chains is not permissible with all wheel/tire combinations. 앫 225/45 R17 앫 Snow chains should only be used on the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s mounting instructions. 앫 245/40 R17 앫 225/40 ZR18 92Y XL (Extra Load) 앫 245/35 ZR18 92Y XL (Extra Load) 349 Operation Maintenance In the “Operation” section you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining, and caring for your vehicle. We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet at the times called for by the maintenance service indicator display. Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and maintenance service indicator at the designated times/mileage will result in vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The maintenance service indicator will notify you when your next maintenance service is due. Starting approximately one month before maintenance service is due, one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or when you switch on the ignition (example service A): 350 Service A Service A Service A Carry out in XXXXX miles (km) in XXX days in X day service A The maintenance services will be indicated by showing a service type A through type H in the multifunction display. Types A through H are classified based on estimated time needed to perform the maintenance service, ranging: from Service A (approx. 1 hour) to Service H (approx. 8 hours) i Vehicles equipped with FSS PLUS (Flexible Service System PLUS) only (Canada vehicles): The interval between maintenance services depends on your driving habits. A gentle driving style, moderate engine speeds and the avoidance of short-distance trips will lengthen the interval between maintenance services. Operation Maintenance Clearing the maintenance service indicator The maintenance service indicator is automatically cleared after 30 seconds. You can also clear it yourself. 왘 Press reset button J(컄 page 25) for clearing the maintenance service indicator. The maintenance service indicator is cleared and the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 128). Maintenance service term exceeded If you have exceeded the suggested maintenance service term, you will see the following message in the multifunction display: Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles (km) Service A exceeded by XXX days Service A exceeded by X day In addition, a signal sounds when the message appears. Calling up the maintenance service indicator 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). The standard display menu appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 128). 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly on the multifunction steering wheel until the maintenance service indicator 9 appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 124). 컄컄 Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed maintenance service. 351 Operation Maintenance 컄컄 i If the battery is disconnected, the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the maintenance service indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance service deadline, you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the maintenance service indicator. Do not confuse the maintenance service indicator with the engine oil level indicator N. 352 Resetting the maintenance service indicator i In the event that the maintenance service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can have the maintenance service indicator reset. The automotive maintenance facility carrying out the maintenance service will find the information for resetting the maintenance service indicator in the maintenance-relevant information for your vehicle. Such information is available from either your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz. Only reset if the proper maintenance service has been performed. Resetting the system without performing the proper maintenance service as called for by the maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. If the maintenance service indicator was inadvertently reset, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center correct it. Operation Vehicle care 왔 Vehicle care Cleaning and care of vehicle Warning! G Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the inside. Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle. Always lock away cleaning products and keep them out of reach of children. While in operation, even while parked, your vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the undercarriage and cause lasting damage. Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but also by: More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions: 앫 near the ocean 앫 in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions) Tar 앫 during winter operation Gravel and stone chipping You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage. Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion. 앫 Air pollution 앫 Road salt 앫 앫 To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove: 앫 Grease and oil 앫 Fuel 앫 Coolant 앫 Brake fluid 앫 Bird droppings 앫 Insects 앫 Tree resins, etc. Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences. In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated. Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others applied later. 353 Operation Vehicle care We have selected car-care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology. You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car-care products recommended here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important “how-to” information as well as references to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products. 354 Power washer ! Follow the instructions provided by the power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire. Always replace a damaged tire. Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts. Tar stains Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove. A tar remover is recommended. Operation Vehicle care Paintwork, painted body components ! Affixing stickers, adhesive tape or similar materials to painted body components may damage the paintwork. Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not “bead up”. This should normally be done every 3 to 5 months, depending on the climate and washing detergent used. Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be applied if the paint surface shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss). Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot. 왘 Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle doors, etc.). Engine cleaning Vehicle washing Prior to cleaning the engine compartment, make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from the intrusion of water and cleaning agents. In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible. Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the engine compartment after every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax. Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight. Hand-wash 왘 Use only a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo. 왘 Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water. Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake. 왘 Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently. 왘 Rinse with clean water and thoroughly dry with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish. 355 Operation Vehicle care Automatic car wash i Ornamental moldings You can have your car washed in an automatic car wash from the start. Automatic car washes without brushes are preferable. After running the vehicle through an automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the windshield (컄 page 357). This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by residual wax on the windshield. For regular cleaning and care of very dirty chrome-plated parts, use a chrome cleaner. If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before running it through the automatic car wash. ! Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors. Make sure that the windshield wiper switch is set to 0 (컄 page 56). Otherwise, the rain sensor could activate and cause the wipers to move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle damage. 356 When leaving the car wash, make sure that the mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may vibrate. Operation Vehicle care Headlamps, tail lamps, side makers, turn signal lenses 왘 Cleaning the windows and the wiper blades Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water. ! The windshield wipers must be in a vertical position before folding them away from the windshield. They could otherwise damage the hood. ! Only use window cleaners that are suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window cleaners which are not suitable may damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that contain solvents. Never apply strong force and use only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens surface. Warning! G For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch before cleaning the windshield. Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury. Never open the hood when the wiper arms are folded forward. 왘 Fold the wiper arms forward until it snaps into place. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36). 왘 왘 Turn combination switch to wiper setting II (컄 page 56). Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and detergent solution. 왘 Use a clean cloth and window cleaning solution on all outside and inside glass surfaces. 왘 With wiper arms in vertical position, switch off the ignition (컄 page 36). An automotive glass cleaner is recommended. 컄컄 357 Operation Vehicle care 컄컄 ! Rear window cleaning Light alloy wheels To clean the window interior, do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners containing solvents. Do not touch the inside of the front, rear or side windows with hard objects such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may damage the windows. Clean the rear window with the hardtop fully raised and closed. If possible, clean wheels once a week. ! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch. Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield. 358 Warning! G Do not clean the rear window with the hardtop in a position other than the fully raised and closed position. Otherwise, the hardtop may move unexpectedly which may result in personal injury to you or others. 왘 Use a clean cloth and window cleaning solution on all outside and inside glass surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is recommended. 왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water for cleaning the light alloy wheels. ! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. Acid may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat. Operation Vehicle care ! Plastic and rubber parts Hard plastic trim items The vehicle should not be parked for an extended period of time immediately after it has been cleaned, especially not after the wheel rims have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads. Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system should always be warmed-up before it is parked after cleaning. To do so, please drive your vehicle for several minutes to allow the brakes to dry. 왘 왘 When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care products, take care not to spray them on the brake discs. Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Use Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure onto. ! ! Do not use oil or wax on these parts. To prevent scratches, do not use scouring agents. Instrument cluster and cup holders 왘 왘 Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Steering wheel and gearshift/gear selector lever 왘 Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm solution. Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care. ! Carpets To prevent scratches, do not use scouring agents. 왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets. 359 Operation Vehicle care Headliner and shelf below rear window Upholstery Wood trims 왘 Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that have the tendency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be prevented. 왘 Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt. Seat belts 왘 Use only clear, lukewarm water and soap. ! The webbing must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight. Warning! G Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. 360 Leather upholstery 왘 Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care. Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not become wet. Dampen cloth using water and use damp cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle. ! Do not use solvents like tar remover or wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these may be abrasive. Practical hints What to do if … Where will I find...? Unlocking/locking in an emergency Opening/closing in an emergency Replacing SmartKey batteries Replacing bulbs Replacing wiper blades Flat tire Battery Jump starting Towing the vehicle Fuses 361 Practical hints What to do if … Lamps in instrument cluster Problem - General information: If any of the following lamps in the instrument cluster fails to come on during the Possible cause/consequence The yellow ABS indicator lamp comes on The ABS has detected a malfunction while driving. and has switched off. The BAS and ESP® are also switched off (see messages in display). The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available. bulb self-check when switching on ignition (컄 page 36), have the respective bulb checked and replaced if necessary. Suggested solution 왘 Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability. 왘 Read and observe messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 368). 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as the Failure to follow these instructions inautomatic transmission* may also be creases the risk of an accident. malfunctioning. The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts and the ABS has switched off. 왘 Switch off electrical consumers that are currently not needed, e.g. seat heating*. The battery might not be charged sufficiently. 왘 If necessary, have the generator and battery checked. When the voltage is above this value again, the ABS is operational again. 362 Practical hints What to do if … Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution ; (USA only) The red brake warning You are driving with the parking brake lamp comes on while driv- set. 3 (Canada only) 왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 52). The red brake warning There is insufficient brake fluid in the lamp comes on while driv- reservoir. ing. 왘 Risk of accident! Carefully stop the vehicle and notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem. ing and you hear a warning sound. Warning! G Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned. ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks. 363 Practical hints What to do if … Problem Possible cause/consequence ? (USA only) The yellow engine There is a malfunction in: malfunction indicator ± (Canada only) 앫 the fuel management system lamp comes on while driving. 앫 the ignition system 앫 the emission control system 앫 systems which affect emissions Suggested solution 왘 An on-board diagnostic connector is used by the service station to link the vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble codes. It is located in the front left area of the footwell near the hood release. Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and may switch the engine to its limp-home (emergency operation) mode. Your fuel tank is empty. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 After refueling start, turn off and restart the engine three or four times in succession. The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not need to have your vehicle checked. Additionally you see the message Check gas cap See Operator’s Manual in the multi- function display. 364 A loss of pressure has been detect- 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 304). ed in the fuel system. The fuel cap If it is not closed properly: may not be closed properly or the 왘 Close the fuel cap. fuel system may be leaking. If it is closed properly: 왘 Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Practical hints What to do if … Problem Possible cause/consequence v The yellow ESP warning lamp ® comes on while driving. ® The ESP is deactivated. Suggested solution 왘 Switch the ESP® back on (컄 page 86). If the ESP® cannot be switched back on, have the Adapt your speed and driving to the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz prevailing road, weather and traffic Center as soon as possible. conditions. Risk of accident! The yellow ESP® warning lamp flash- The ESP® or traction control has es while driving. come into operation because of detected traction loss in at least one tire. 왘 When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible. 왘 While driving, ease up on the accelerator. 왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions. 왘 Do not deactivate the ESP®. Exceptions: (컄 page 84). Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. 4 The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp The fuel level has gone below the recomes on while driving. Additionally you see the message Reserve fuel in the multifunction display. serve mark. 왘 Refuel at the next gas station (컄 page 304). After refueling you will see the message 1 message in the multifunction display. 왘 Press reset button J to confirm the message (컄 page 24). 365 Practical hints What to do if … Problem Possible cause/consequence 4 The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp The fuel cap is not closed properly. Suggested solution 왘 Close the fuel cap. The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passenger to fasten your seat belts before driving off. 왘 Fasten your seat belts (컄 page 71). You and/or your passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat belts. 왘 Fasten your seat belts (컄 page 71). There are items placed on the passenger seat and therefore the system senses the passenger seat as being occupied. 왘 Remove the items from the passenger seat and put them in a safe place. There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags or emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to deploy in an accident. 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. flashes after starting the engine. < The red seat belt telltale comes on after starting the engine with all doors closed. The red seat belt telltale flashes and you additionally hear an intermittent warning signal with increasing intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h). 1 The red SRS indicator lamp comes on while driving. Warning! G In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational. For your safety, we 366 strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in an accident and/or injury to you or to others. Practical hints What to do if … Lamp in center console Problem 75 Possible cause/consequence The passenger front air bag off indicator lamp comes on and remains illuminated (컄 page 77). Suggested solution TM A BabySmart child seat is installed on the passenger seat. Therefore the passenger front air bag is switched off. The system is malfunctioning when there is no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the passenger seat. The passenger front air The system is malfunctioning. bag off indicator lamp does not come on or does not remain illuminated with a BabySmartTM child seat properly installed on the passenger seat. 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. 왘 Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat. 왘 Check installation of the child seat (컄 page 75). If the passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out: 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. 367 Practical hints What to do if … Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display Warning and malfunction messages appear in the multifunction display located in the instrument cluster. Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal. Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this Operator’s Manual. Selecting the vehicle status message memory menu in the control system (컄 page 132) displays both cleared and uncleared messages. High-priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color. 368 Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button J (컄 page 24) or button j, k, ·, or è on the steering wheel. Other high-priority messages and messages of less immediate priority (regular display colors) can be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button J (컄 page 24) or button j, k, ·, or è on the steering wheel. They are then stored in the vehicle status message memory (컄 page 132). Remember that clearing a message will only make the message disappear. Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the message to appear. Warning! G All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury. Practical hints What to do if … Warning! G No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative. Contact your nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. i Switching on ignition (컄 page 36) causes all instrument cluster lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) as well as the multifunction display to come on. Make sure the lamps and multifunction display are in working order before starting your journey. On the pages that follow, you will find a compilation of the most important warning and malfunction messages that may appear in the multifunction display. For your convenience the messages are divided into two sections: 앫 Text messages (컄 page 370) 앫 Symbol messages (컄 page 374) 369 Practical hints What to do if … Text messages Display message ABS malfunction Visit workshop Display malfunction Visit workshop Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off. The ESP® and the BAS are also deactivated. 왘 Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability. The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available. 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. The ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. 왘 Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability. 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. Cruise control 370 Cruise control Drive to workshop Cruise control is malfunctioning. 왘 Have cruise control checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Practical hints What to do if … Display message ESP malfunction Visit workshop Possible cause/consequence ® The ESP was deactivated because of a malfunction. The ABS might not be operational. The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP® available. unavailable See Operator’s Manual Possible solution 왘 Continue driving with added caution. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. The self-diagnosis has not been com- The display will clear after driving a short displeted. tance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP® available. The charging voltage has fallen below ten volts. The ESP® has switched off. The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP® available. 왘 Continue driving with added caution. When the voltage is above this value again, the ESP® is operational again. 왘 If necessary, have the generator and battery checked. 371 Practical hints What to do if … Display message ESP Display malfunction Visit workshop Possible cause/consequence ® ® The ESP or the ESP display is malfunctioning. Possible solution 왘 Continue driving with added caution. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. SRS Restraint system malfunction Drive to workshop The SRS system is malfunctioning. 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Transmission Visit workshop Vehicles with automatic transmission*: The provided operating safety of the automatic transmission is reduced. 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 372 Practical hints What to do if … Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Run Flat Indicator inactive The Run Flat Indicator* is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the Run Flat Indicator* checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Tire pressure Check tires The pressure is too low in one or more tires. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you. 왘 Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure as required (컄 page 329). 왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 408). 왘 Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator* after adjusting the tire inflation pressure values (컄 page 304). 왘 Make sure that the correct tire inflation pressure is set for each tire. Then reactivate Run Flat Indicator There was a warning message about a loss in tire inflation pressure and the Run Flat Indicator* has not been reactivated yet. 왘 Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator*. Run Flat Indicator unavailable The Run Flat Indicator* has been switched off due to an error. 왘 Have the Run Flat Indicator* checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Check tires Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. 373 Practical hints What to do if … Symbol messages Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution # Battery/Alternator Visit workshop The battery is no longer charging. Possible causes: 왘 앫 Alternator malfunctioning 앫 Broken poly-V-belt Do not forget that the brake system requires electrical energy and may be operating with restricted capability. Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the stopping distance is increased. 374 Stop immediately and check the poly-V-belt. If it is broken: 왘 Do not continue to drive. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If it is in order: 왘 Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness. Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution USA only: Release parking brake You are driving with the parking brake set. 왘 Release parking brake (컄 page 52). Brake fluid Visit workshop There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir. 왘 Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem. Brake wear Visit workshop The brake pads have reached their wear limit. 왘 Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible. ; Canada only: ! USA only: ; Canada only: 3 2 Warning! G Driving with the message Brake fluid Visit workshop displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. ! ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks. Brake pad thickness must be visually checked by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned. 375 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display message Possible cause/conse- Possible solution quence Ï Coolant Stop, engine off The poly-V-belt could be broken. 왘 Stop the vehicle and immediately turn off the engine. 왘 Check the poly-V-belt (컄 page 437). If it is broken: 왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If it is in order: During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C). 376 왘 Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Observe the coolant temperature display (컄 page 128). ! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Ï Coolant Stop, engine off The coolant is too hot. 왘 Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine. 왘 Only start the engine again after the message disappears. You could otherwise damage the engine. Coolant Check level The coolant level is too low. 왘 Add coolant (컄 page 313). 왘 If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. / Warning! G Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Warning! G Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You can be seriously burned. ! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with this message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat, causing major engine damage. 377 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution ± Display malfunction Visit workshop Certain electronic systems are unable to relay information to the control system. The following systems may have failed: 왘 G J 378 Display malfunction Visit workshop Doors open 앫 Coolant temperature display 앫 Tachometer 앫 Cruise control display The instrument cluster display is malfunctioning. Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. When the display is malfunctioning, warnings and malfunction messages might not be displayed. 왘 Continue driving with added caution. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. The displays for several systems have malfunctioned. Some systems themselves may also have malfunctioned. 왘 Continue driving with added caution. 왘 Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You are attempting to drive with one or more doors open. 왘 Close all doors. Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution N Check oil level when next refueling SLK 280 and SLK 350 only: 왘 The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level. Check the engine oil level (컄 page 308) and add engine oil as required (컄 page 312). 왘 If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine checked for possible leaks. USA only: SLK 55 AMG only: 왘 Add 1 qt. engine oil when next refueling The engine oil level is too low. Add engine oil (컄 page 312) and check the engine oil level (컄 page 308). Canada only: Add 1 liter engine oil when next refueling When the message Add 1 qt. (Canada: 1 liter) engine oil when next refueling (SLK 55 AMG) or Check oil level when next refueling (SLK 280, SLK 350) appears while the engine is running and at operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped to approximately the minimum level. When this occurs, the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further. Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil leaks are noted, drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be topped to the required level with an approved oil specified in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet. ! The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 379 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution N Engine oil level Stop, engine off SLK 55 AMG only: 왘 There is no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage. Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon as possible. 왘 Turn off the engine. 왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 312) and check the engine oil level (컄 page 308). 왘 Have the measuring system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Have oil siphoned or drained off. Observe all legal requirements with respect to its disposal. 왘 Have the engine oil checked. 380 Engine oil level Visit workshop SLK 55 AMG only: Engine oil level Reduce oil level SLK 55 AMG only: Engine oil Visit workshop SLK 55 AMG only: The measuring system is malfunctioning. You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of damaging the engine or the catalytic converter. There may be water in the engine oil. Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution A Fuel reserve The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark. 왘 Refuel at the next gas station (컄 page 304). Check gas cap See Operator’s Manual The fuel cap may not be closed properly. 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 304). If it is not closed properly: 왘 Close the fuel cap. If it is closed properly: K O F Lock retractable roof You are driving with the retractable hardtop not properly locked. 왘 Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location. Observe the traffic situation around you. 왘 Push the retractable hardtop switch forward or rearward until the retractable hardtop is completely closed or open (컄 page 252). Retractable roof Visit workshop The retractable hardtop is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the retractable hardtop checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Close hood! You are driving with the hood open. 왘 Close the hood (컄 page 307). Replace key The SmartKey is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 381 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . 3rd brake light The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Tail lamp / brake lamp The left tail lamp/brake lamp is left malfunctioning. This message will Back-up lamp on only appear if a critical number of 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. LEDs have stopped working. A backup bulb has been brought into use. Tail lamp / brake lamp The right tail lamp/brake lamp is right malfunctioning. This message will Back-up lamp on only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working. A backup bulb has been brought into use. 382 Brake lamp Visit workshop Brake lamp illumination is delayed or lamp is permanently on. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Front foglamp, L The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Front foglamp, R The right front foglamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Rear foglamp Back-up lamp on The rear fog lamp on the driver’s side is malfunctioning. A backup bulb has been brought into use. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. High beam, left The left high beam lamp (halogen headlamps)/high beam flasher lamp (Bi-Xenon* headlamps) is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. High beam, right The right high beam lamp (halogen headlamps)/high beam flasher lamp (Bi-Xenon* headlamps) is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Lamp sensor Drive to workshop The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps switch on automatically. 왘 In the control system, set lamp operation to manual (컄 page 143). 왘 Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch (컄 page 110). 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Left license plate lamp malfunction The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Right license plate lamp malfunction The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. 383 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Left reverse lamp malfunction The left backup lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Right reverse lamp malfunction The right backup lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Low beam, left The left low beam lamp is malfunc- Halogen headlamp: tioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Bi-Xenon* headlamp: 왘 Low beam, right Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. The right low beam lamp is malfunc- Halogen headlamp: tioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Bi-Xenon* headlamp: 384 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Park. light, front left The left front parking lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Park. light, front right The right front parking lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Remove key You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey. 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Side marker lamp, front left The left front side marker lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Side marker lamp, front right The right front side marker lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Rear left side marker lamp malfunction The left rear side marker lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Rear right side marker The right rear side marker lamp is lamp malfunction malfunctioning. This message will 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working. Tail light, left Back-up lamp on The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working. A backup bulb has been brought into use. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Tail light, right Back-up lamp on The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working. A backup bulb has been brought into use. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. 385 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Turn off lights You have forgotten to switch off the headlamps when exiting the vehicle and no SmartKey is in the starter switch. 왘 Switch off the headlamps. Turn signal in mirror, left The left turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Turn signal in mirror, right The right turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Turn signal, front left The left front turn signal is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Turn signal, front right The right front turn signal is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Rear left turn signal Back-up lamp on The left rear turn signal is malfunctioning. A backup bulb has been brought into use. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Rear right turn signal The right rear turn signal is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Back-up lamp on tioning. A backup bulb has been brought into use. 386 Practical hints What to do if … Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution < Seat belt system Visit workshop The seat belt system is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Function Not available This display appears if button s or t on the multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone*. Ê Close trunk lid! This message will appear whenever the trunk lid is open. 왘 Close the trunk lid. W Washer fluid Top up The fluid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir has dropped below its minimum mark. 왘 Add washer fluid (컄 page 315). t 387 Practical hints Where will I find...? First aid kit Removing the vehicle tool kit The first aid kit is stored in a parcel net behind the driver’s seat. Vehicles with spare wheel Vehicle tool kit, vehicle jack The vehicle tool kit is stored in a storage compartment under the trunk floor. The following is included: 앫 Collapsible chock 앫 Vehicle jack 앫 Protective wrap 앫 Alignment bolt 앫 Towing eye bolt 앫 Wheel wrench 앫 Spare fuses 앫 Fuse extractor 앫 Valve extractor 앫 Electric air pump 앫 TIREFIT kit* 388 1 Spare wheel 2 Vehicle tool kit (under collapsible tire, together with wheel bolts for spare wheel with collapsible tire) 3 Retaining screw 왘 Open the trunk (컄 page 98). 왘 Lift up trunk floor. 왘 Loosen retaining screw 3 by turning it counter-clockwise. 왘 Remove spare wheel 1. 왘 Remove vehicle tool kit 2. 1 Collapsible wheel chock 2 Vehicle jack 3 Protective wrap 4 Alignment bolt 5 Towing eye bolt 6 Wheel wrench 7 Spare fuses, fuse extractor and valve extractor 8 Electric air pump Practical hints Where will I find...? Vehicles with TIREFIT* Vehicle jack Warning! 1 TIREFIT kit 2 Vehicle jack 3 Collapsible wheel chock 4 Towing eye bolt 5 Alignment bolt 6 Wheel wrench 7 Spare fuses, fuse extractor and valve extractor 8 Electric air pump 왘 Open the trunk (컄 page 98). 왘 Lift up trunk floor. The vehicle jack is located in the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor. G The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack. Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle. Storage position 왘 Remove vehicle jack from its compartment. 왘 Turn crank handle in the direction of arrow as far as it will go. 389 Practical hints Where will I find...? Setting up the collapsible wheel chock 왘 Tilt both plates upward 1. The collapsible wheel chock serves to additionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while changing the wheel. 왘 Fold the lower plate outward 2. 왘 Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way into the openings of the base plate 3. Operational position 왘 Turn crank handle clockwise. Before storing the vehicle jack in its compartment: 앫 It should be fully collapsed. 앫 The handle must be folded in (storage position). 1 Tilt the plate upward 2 Fold the lower plate outward 3 Insert the plate 390 Practical hints Where will I find...? Spare wheel with collapsible tire The spare wheel is stored in the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor. Storing the spare wheel with collapsible tire 왘 Screw the valve insert back into the valve. If you wish to store the spare wheel after use, carry out the following steps. Otherwise the spare wheel will not fit the storage compartment. 왘 Screw the valve cap back on the valve. 왘 Pull the protective wrap provided with the vehicle tool kit over the spare wheel. 왘 Store the spare wheel and the valve extractor in the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor. 왘 Pierce the protective wrap with retaining screw 3. 왘 Secure the spare wheel by turning retaining screw 3 clockwise. ! Make sure the collapsible tire is dry when storing it. 1 Spare wheel, spare wheel bolts (located under plastic cover on the outside of spare wheel rim) 2 Vehicle tool kit (under collapsible tire) 3 Retaining screw 왘 Loosen retaining screw 3 by turning it counterclockwise. 왘 Remove spare wheel 1. 왘 Take off the wheel bolts for spare wheel 1. 왘 Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the collapsible tire. 왘 Take the valve extractor from the vehicle tool kit (컄 page 388). 왘 Unscrew the valve insert from the valve and allow the air to escape. i It may take a few minutes for the collapsible tire to deflate completely. 391 Practical hints Where will I find...? Warning! G The dimensions of the spare wheel with collapsible tire are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a spare wheel with collapsible tire mounted. The spare wheel with collapsible tire should only be used temporarily, and should be replaced with a regular road wheel as quickly as possible. 392 In case of a flat tire, you may temporarily use the spare wheel with collapsible tire when observing the following restrictions: 앫 Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). 앫 Drive to the nearest tire repair facility to have the flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate. 앫 Do not operate vehicle with more than one spare wheel with collapsible tire mounted. For more information, see “Rims and tires” (컄 page 439). Spare wheel bolts 1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims 2 Wheel bolt for spare wheel with collapsible tire (located under plastic cover on the outside of spare wheel rim) Practical hints Where will I find...? ! Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mounting the spare wheel with collapsible tire. The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the spare wheel with collapsible tire will physically damage the vehicle’s brakes. Warning! G Make sure to use the original length wheel bolts when remounting the original wheel after it has been repaired. 393 Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency Removing the mechanical key Unlocking the driver’s door To cancel the alarm, do one of the following: 1 Mechanical key locking tab 2 Mechanical key 1 Unlocking 앫 Press button Œ or ‹on the SmartKey. 왘 Move locking tab 1 direction of arrow. 왘 앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. Slide mechanical key 2 out of the housing. Unlocking the vehicle If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey, open the driver’s door and the trunk using the mechanical key. i Unlocking and opening the driver’s door and/or the trunk with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. 394 왘 Insert the mechanical key into the driver’s door lock until it stops. 왘 Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1. The driver’s door is unlocked. Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency Unlocking and opening the trunk 왘 A minimum height clearance of 5.78 ft (1.76 m) is required to open the trunk lid. Fully insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock. 왘 Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1 until it stops, The trunk lid lock is located next to the handle above the rear license plate recess. If you cannot lock the vehicle with the SmartKey, do the following: 왘 Close the passenger door and the trunk lid. 왘 Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. Press the central locking switch in the upper part of the center console (컄 page 102). 왘 Turn the mechanical key back and remove it from the trunk lid lock. Check to see whether the locking knob on the passenger door has moved down. 왘 If necessary, push it down manually. and simultaneously 왘 Locking the vehicle pull the trunk lid handle and lift lid. ! 왘 The passenger door is locked. Trunk lid lock 왘 Exit the vehicle and close the driver’s door. 1 Unlocking in an emergency 395 컄컄 Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency 컄컄 Manually unlocking the gear selector lever (automatic transmission*) In case of power failure, the gear selector lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle. 1 Locking 왘 Insert the mechanical key into the driver’s door lock until it stops. 왘 Turn the mechanical key clockwise to position 1. The driver’s door is locked. 396 왘 Insert flat, blunt object (e.g. screwdriver) into the left edge of cover 1 at the position indicated by the arrows. 왘 Loosen cover 1 using this object. 왘 Using your hands, pull cover 1 out and remove. 왘 Push down and hold release 2 in direction of arrow. 왘 Simultaneously move gear selector lever out of position P. The gear selector lever is unlocked now. i 1 Gear selector lever cover 2 Release The gear selector lever is locked again as soon as you place it in position P again. Practical hints Opening/closing in an emergency 왔 Opening/closing in an emergency Raising retractable hardtop manually Warning! Warning! G If the retractable hardtop does not completely open or close, the roof hydraulics will lose pressure and the retractable hardtop is lowered 앫 after approximately 7 minutes when the ignition is switched on 앫 after approximately 15 seconds when the ignition is switched off G Manually closing the retractable hardtop is a complicated and technically demanding procedure and should only be performed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or qualified technician. Attempting to manually close the retractable hardtop may cause damage to the retractable hardtop and/or personal injury. Warning! G To prevent possible accidents, drive the vehicle only with the retractable hardtop either completely closed and locked, or fully lowered into its storage compartment. Shortly before the hardtop is lowered, a warning will sound. In the multifunction display you will see K and the message Retractable roof being opened. 앫 Properly lock retractable hardtop before continuing to drive (컄 page 252). 397 Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries If the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked. It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Warning! G Keep the batteries out of reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help immediately. 398 Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. i When inserting the batteries, make sure they are clean and free of lint. When replacing batteries, always replace both batteries. The required replacement batteries are available at any Mercedes-Benz Center. Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries SmartKey 왘 Insert mechanical key 1 in direction of arrow in side opening. Replacement batteries: Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent. 왘 Using mechanical key 1, push gray slide 2 to unlatch battery compartment 3. 왘 Remove mechanical key 1 (컄 page 394). 왘 Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries 4 under contact spring 5 with the positive terminal (+) facing up. 왘 Return battery compartment 2 into the housing until it locks into place. 왘 Pull battery compartment 3 out of the housing in direction of arrow. 왘 Slide mechanical key 1 back into the SmartKey. 왘 Remove the discharged batteries in direction of arrow. 왘 Check the operation of the SmartKey. 1 Mechanical key 2 Slide 3 Battery compartment 4 Battery 5 Contact spring 399 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all times. Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important. Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp adjustment. 400 i i If the headlamps are fogged up on the inside as a result of high humidity, driving the vehicle a short distance with the lights on should clear up the fogging. Backup bulbs will be brought into use when lamps malfunction. Observe the messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 382). Practical hints Replacing bulbs Bulbs Front lamps Lamp Rear lamps Type Type 1 Additional turn signal lamp LED 8 Rear fog lamp (driver’s P 21 W side only) 2 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W 3 Halogen headlamp: Low beam 9 High mounted brake lamp H7 (55 W) D2S-35W a Tail, parking, standing, LED side marker lamp and brake lamp 4 Front fog lamp HB4 (51 W) b License plate lamps C5W 5 Parking and standing lamp W5W c Backup lamp P 21 W d Turn signal lamp PY 21 W Bi-Xenon* headlamp: Low and high beam1 6 Halogen headlamp: High beam/high beam flasher H7 (55 W) Bi-Xenon* headlamp: High beam flasher 7 Side marker lamp 1 Lamp H7 (55 W) LED i Vehicles equipped with corner-illuminating front fog lamps*: Front fog lamps use H7 (55 W) lamps. W5W Vehicles with Bi-Xenon* headlamps: Low beam and high beam use the same D2S-35W lamp. Do not replace the Bi-Xenon* bulbs yourself. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 401 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Warning! G Notes on bulb replacement 앫 Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb. Only use 12-volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating. 앫 Switch lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits. Keep bulbs out of reach of children. 앫 Always use a clean lint-free cloth when handling bulbs. Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A bulb can explode if you: 앫 touch or move it when hot 앫 drop the bulb 앫 scratch the bulb Wear eye and hand protection. Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician. 402 앫 Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease. 앫 If the newly installed bulb does not come on, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: 앫 Additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors 앫 Bi-Xenon* lamps 앫 Front fog lamps 앫 High mounted brake lamp 앫 Brake lamps 앫 Front and rear side marker lamps 앫 Parking/standing lamps in the tail lamp assemblies i Have the headlamp adjustment checked regularly. Practical hints Replacing bulbs Replacing bulbs for front lamps Warning! Before you start to replace a bulb for a front lamp, do the following first: 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to position M (컄 page 110). 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 307). G Do not remove the cover 1 for the Bi-Xenon* headlamp. Because of high voltage in Bi-Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician. 1 Housing cover for low beam (halogen headlamps only) Housing cover for Bi-Xenon* headlamps. Do not remove. 2 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp 3 Bulb socket for high beam/high beam flasher lamp 4 Bulb socket for parking and standing light lamp 5 Bulb socket for low beam bulb (Halogen headlamps only) 403 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Low beam bulb (Halogen headlamps only) 왘 High beam/high beam flasher bulb (Halogen headlamps) / High beam flasher bulb (Bi-Xenon* headlamps) 왘 Turn bulb socket 2 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove. 왘 Press gently onto the bulb and turn it counterclockwise out of bulb socket 2. Press the new bulb into bulb socket 3. 왘 Place bulb socket 3 back into the lamp and turn it clockwise. Press the new bulb gently into bulb socket 2 and turn it clockwise. 왘 Place bulb socket 2 back into the lamp and turn it clockwise. Turn housing cover 1 counterclockwise and remove. 왘 Turn bulb socket 5 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove. Turn bulb socket 3 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove. 왘 Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 3. 왘 Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 5. 왘 왘 Press the new bulb into bulb socket 5. 왘 왘 Place bulb socket 5 back into the lamp and turn it clockwise. 왘 Reinstall housing cover 1. 왘 404 Front turn signal bulb Parking and standing lamp bulb 왘 Turn bulb socket 4 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove. 왘 Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 4. 왘 Press the new bulb into bulb socket 4. 왘 Place bulb socket 4 back into the lamp and turn it clockwise. Practical hints Replacing bulbs Replacing bulbs for rear lamps Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear lamp, do the following first: 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to position M (컄 page 110). 왘 Open the trunk lid (컄 page 98). 왘 Fold corresponding trim to side. 왘 Turn the respective bulb socket counterclockwise and remove. 왘 Press gently onto the bulb and turn counterclockwise out of its bulb socket. 왘 Press the new bulb gently into its bulb socket and turn clockwise. 왘 Reinstall the bulb socket and turn clockwise until it engages. 왘 Reinstall trim. Tail lamp unit License plate lamp 1 Screw 왘 Loosen both screws 1. 왘 Remove the license plate lamp. 왘 Replace the bulb. 왘 Reinstall the license plate lamp. 왘 Retighten screws 1. 1 Bulb socket for rear fog lamp (driver’s side only) 2 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp 3 Bulb socket for backup lamp 405 Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Removing wiper blades Warning! G For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise, the motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury. ! To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper arms should only be folded forward when in the vertical position. 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1. 왘 Turn combination switch to wiper setting II (컄 page 56). 왘 With wiper arms in vertical position, turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0. 왘 Fold the wiper arms forward until they engage. 1 Wiper blade 2 Tabs 3 Attachment 4 Cover 왘 Press tabs 2 together and tilt wiper blade 1 in direction of arrow. Tabs 2 on both recesses of attachment 3 are detached. 왘 406 Maintaining its tilted position, remove wiper blade 1 out of attachment 3. Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Installing wiper blades 1 Cover 2 Guide tab 3 Attachment 4 Tabs 왘 Maintaining a tilted position of the wiper blade, place cover 1 onto attachment 3 so that guide tab 2 is under cover 1. 왘 Tilt the wiper blade in direction of the arrow towards the wiper arm. 왘 Simultaneously press tabs 4 together and let the wiper blade engage into both recesses of attachment 3. 왘 Check if the wiper blade is securely fastened. 왘 Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the windshield. Make sure you hold on to the wiper arm when folding it back. ! Never open the hood when the wiper arms are folded forward. Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield. Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted. Make sure the wiper blades are properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage. For your convenience, you should have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 407 Practical hints Flat tire The SLK 55 AMG with Performance Package* is equipped with a TIREFIT kit. 왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 61). 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. i i SLK 55 AMG with Performance Package* only. Preparing the vehicle 왘 Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving traffic on a hard surface. 왘 Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 왘 Turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels are in a straight ahead position. 왘 Set the parking brake (컄 page 52). 왘 Move the gear selector lever* to P (manual transmission to first or reverse gear). 408 Sealing tires with TIREFIT Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. Warning! 왘 Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway. G Keep TIREFIT away from sparks, open flame or heat source. Do not smoke. Small tire punctures, particularly those in the tread, can be sealed with TIREFIT. TIREFIT can be used in ambient temperatures down to -4°F (-20°C). Practical hints Flat tire Warning! G TIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFIT cannot be used for cuts or punctures larger than approx. 0.16 in (4 mm) and tire damage caused by driving with extremely low tire inflation pressure, or on a flat tire, or a damaged wheel. Do not drive the vehicle under such circumstances. Contact your nearest Mercedes-Benz Center for assistance or call Roadside Assistance. 왘 Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. 왘 Take TIREFIT, the sticker, and the electric air pump out of the trunk. 왘 Attach the sticker where it will be easily seen by the driver on the instrument cluster. Warning! i G If sealant has leaked out, let it dry. You can then peel it off. Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact with hair, eyes or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed or absorbed through the skin - causes skin, eye and respiratory irritation. Any contact with eyes or skin should be flushed immediately with plenty of water. If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT, change clothing as soon as possible. In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Warning! G 1 TIREFIT container 2 Flap 3 Notch 4 Electrical plug 5 Air hose 6 Flange Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. 왘 Open flap 2 on the electric air pump. Do not induce vomiting! 왘 Pull plug 4 and air hose 5 out of the pump housing. 컄컄 Consult a physician immediately. Keep away from open flame or heat source. 409 Practical hints Flat tire 컄컄왘 왘 Screw the air pump’s air hose 5 onto flange 6 of the TIREFIT container. 왘 Unscrew the valve cap from tire valve 7. Stick TIREFIT container 1 upside down into notch 3 of the electric air pump. 왘 Screw filler hose a onto tire valve 7. 왘 Close vent screw 9 on air hose 4. 왘 Insert electrical plug 4 into the power outlet in the passenger footwell (컄 page 271). ! The cigarette lighter (컄 page 270) is not designed for use with the electric air pump. Use the power outlet in the passenger footwell (컄 page 271) for electric air pump operation. 7 Tire valve 8 Electric air pump switch 9 Pressure gauge and vent screw a Filler hose Warning! G Observe safety instructions on air pump label. 410 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 (컄 page 36). 왘 Press I on electric air pump switch 8. The electric air pump should now switch on and inflate the tire. ! Do not operate the electric air pump longer than 6 minutes without interruption. Otherwise it may overheat. You may operate the air pump again after it has cooled off. After 5 minutes, the pressure gauge must display at least 26 psi (1.8 bar). The air hose can become hot during inflation. Please exercise appropriate caution. 왘 If this tire inflation pressure is not attained, turn off the electric air pump, detach the filler hose from the tire valve, and drive vehicle back and forth very slowly approximately 30 ft (10 m). This serves to better distribute the TIREFIT sealant material inside the tire. 왘 Unscrew the air pump’s air hose 5 from flange 6 of the TIREFIT container. 왘 Screw air hose 5 onto tire valve 7. 왘 Inflate the tire again. Practical hints Flat tire Warning! G If a tire inflation pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar) is not attained, tire is too severely damaged for TIREFIT to provide a reliable tire repair. 왘 Store the electrical plug and the air hose behind the flap and place the electrical air pump back in the trunk. 왘 Close the trunk lid. 왘 Drive off immediately. In this case, TIREFIT cannot properly seal the tire. The TIREFIT sealant will distribute itself evenly inside the tire. 왘 After attaining a tire inflation pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar), press 0 on electric air pump switch 8. The electric air pump should now be switched off. 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the ignition to position 0 (컄 page 36). 왘 Detach the electric air pump. The air hose may still be hot. Please exercise appropriate caution. Warning! G Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed to operate at higher speeds. The sticker must be attached on the instrument cluster where it will be easily seen by the driver. Vehicle handling characteristics may change. Adapt your driving accordingly. 왘 G If tire inflation pressure has fallen below 20 psi (1.3 bar) do not continue to drive the vehicle. Do not drive the vehicle. Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance. Warning! Park your vehicle safely away from the roadway and contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or Roadside Assistance. If tire inflation pressure is at least 20 psi (1.3 bar), inflate tire to correct pressure (see placard on the driver’s door B-pillar), and drive vehicle to nearest tire repair facility to have tire repaired or replaced. Recommended duration of use: 300 miles (500 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) with the recommended tire inflation pressure. After driving the vehicle for an initial 10 minutes, check the tire inflation pressure using pressure gauge 9 on the air pump. 411 컄컄 Practical hints Flat tire 컄컄 Warning! G Follow recommend inflation pressures. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes, etc. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label on the pillar in the driver’s door opening). Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible to obtain a new TIREFIT kit. 왘 Bring used TIREFIT materials to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for proper disposal. Warning! Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed to operate at higher speeds. The sticker must be attached on the instrument cluster where it will be easily seen by the driver. Vehicle handling characteristics may change. Adapt your driving accordingly. 왘 412 G Replace your TIREFIT container every 4 years. Replacement containers are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Mounting the spare wheel Warning! G The dimensions of the spare wheel with collapsible tire are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a spare wheel with collapsible tire mounted. Adapt your driving style accordingly. The spare wheel with collapsible tire is for temporary use only. When driving with spare wheel with collapsible tire mounted, ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Practical hints Flat tire Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible to have the spare wheel with collapsible tire replaced with a regular road wheel. Never operate the vehicle with more than one spare wheel with collapsible tire mounted. Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare wheel with collapsible tire is mounted. Preparing the vehicle Lifting the vehicle Prepare the vehicle as described (컄 page 408). 왘 왘 Take the collapsible tire, wheel wrench, wheel bolts, jack, and electric air pump out of the trunk (컄 page 388). Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chocks (not included) or other sizeable objects. One wheel chock is included with the vehicle tool kit (컄 page 388). When changing wheel on a level surface: 왘 Place the wheel chock in front of and another sizeable object behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed. Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on a level surface. However, should circumstances require you to do so on a hill, place the wheel chock and the other sizeable object as follows: 왘 Place the wheel chock and another sizeable object on the downhill side blocking both wheels of the axle not being worked on. 413 Practical hints Flat tire Warning! G The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into either side of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack. Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Be sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle. 1 Wheel wrench 왘 On wheel to be changed, loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts in direction of arrow (approximately one full turn with wheel wrench 1). The jack take-up brackets are located directly behind the front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel housings. 2 Jack 3 Take-up bracket 왘 Place jack 2 on firm ground. 왘 Position jack 2 under take-up bracket 3 so that it is always vertical (plumb-line) as seen from the side, even if the vehicle is parked on an incline. Warning! G Position the jack only on the jack take-up brackets designed for this purpose. If the jack is not properly positioned, the vehicle may fall off of the jack. 414 Practical hints Flat tire 왘 Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. Never start engine while vehicle is raised. Warning! G The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. 앫 Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. 앫 Never lie down under the raised vehicle. Removing the wheel Mounting the spare wheel 4 Alignment bolt 1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims 2 Wheel bolt for spare wheel with collapsible tire (located under plastic cover on the outside of spare wheel rim) 왘 Unscrew the upper-most wheel bolt and remove. 왘 Replace this wheel bolt with alignment bolt 4 supplied in the vehicle tool kit. 왘 Remove the remaining bolts. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. This could result in damage to the bolt and wheel hub threads. 왘 Remove the wheel. 415 Practical hints Flat tire ! Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mounting the spare wheel with collapsible tire. The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the spare wheel with collapsible tire will physically damage the vehicle’s brakes. 왘 Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub. ! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt. 416 Warning! G Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted. Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance. Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel bolts. 왘 Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on. 왘 Insert the wheel bolts and tighten them slightly. Practical hints Flat tire Warning! G Use only genuine equipment Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose. Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could fall off the jack. 왘 Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last wheel bolt and tighten slightly. 왘 Inflate the collapsible tire (컄 page 417). Inflating the collapsible tire Warning! G Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly mounted. Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric pump (컄 page 388) before lowering the vehicle. Warning! G Observe instructions on air pump label. 1 Flap 2 Air pump switch 3 Electrical plug 4 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent screw 5 Union nut ! Do not lower the vehicle before inflating the collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim may be damaged. 417 Practical hints Flat tire 왘 Take the electric air pump out of the trunk (컄 page 388). 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1. 왘 Open flap 1 on air pump. 왘 Press I on electric air pump switch 2. 왘 Pull out electrical plug 3 and air hose with pressure gauge 4. 왘 Close vent screw on air hose 4. 왘 Remove the valve cap from the tire valve. 왘 Screw air hose 4 with union nut 5 onto the collapsible tire valve. 왘 Make sure electric air pump switch 2 is set to 0. 왘 Insert electrical plug 3 into the power outlet in the passenger footwell (컄 page 271). The electric air pump switches on and inflates the collapsible tire. 왘 This takes about 5 minutes for the collapsible tire. Air hose 4 and union nut 5 can become hot during inflation. Exercise proper caution to avoid burning yourself when using the equipment. ! Do not operate the electric air pump longer than 6 minutes without interruption. Otherwise it may overheat. ! The cigarette lighter (컄 page 270) is not designed for use with the electric air pump. Use the power outlet in the passenger footwell (컄 page 271) for electric air pump operation. 418 Inflate the collapsible tire to approximately 51 psi (3.5 bar). You may operate the electric air pump again after it has cooled off. 왘 Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2. 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0. The electric air pump should now be switched off. 왘 If the tire inflation pressure is above 51 psi (3.5 bar), release excess tire inflation pressure using the vent screw on air hose 4. Practical hints Flat tire Warning! G Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. 왘 Detach the electric air pump. 왘 Reinstall collapsible tire valve cap. 왘 Store electrical plug 3 and air hose 4 behind flap 1 and place the electric air pump back in the trunk. 왘 Lowering the vehicle Warning! G Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric pump (컄 page 417) before lowering the vehicle. 왘 왘 Lower vehicle by turning the crank counterclockwise until vehicle is resting fully on its own weight. Remove the jack. 왘 Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly in the direction of the arrow, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight. Observe a tightening torque of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm). 컄컄 1 - 5 Wheel bolts Lower the vehicle (컄 page 419). 419 Practical hints Flat tire 컄컄 Warning! G Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm). 왘 Fully collapse the jack. 왘 Place the vehicle tool kit, electric air pump, and the jack back in the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor. 왘 Wrap the damaged wheel in the protective sheet provided with the spare wheel and put the wheel in the trunk. i The flat tire may be transported in the trunk when the retractable hardtop is closed. 420 Practical hints Battery 왔 Battery The battery is located in the engine compartment on the right-hand side below the windshield washer fluid reservoir. Warning! G G Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death. Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit. Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries, see “Battery” (컄 page 314). Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident. Never lean over batteries while connecting them, as you could otherwise be injured. 1 Battery 2 Positive terminal 3 Negative terminal Warning! Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc. ! Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running or the SmartKey is in the starter switch. Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be severely damaged. Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. 421 Practical hints Battery 왘 Disconnecting the battery Pull up parking brake lever firmly and move gear selector lever* to position P (manual transmission to Neutral). Removing the battery 왘 Remove the screw on the swivel bar. 왘 Switch off all electrical consumers. 왘 Remove the swivel bar. With a disconnected battery 왘 Remove SmartKey from starter switch. 왘 앫 you will no longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter switch 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 307). 앫 automatic transmission*: the gear selector lever will remain locked in position P 왘 Turn locks 2 one quarter turn. 왘 Remove water tray 1. Pull out the battery ventilation tube from the battery (depending on battery arrangement in your vehicle model, the ventilation tube is located either on the left or right side of the battery). 왘 Read and observe safety instructions and precautions (컄 page 421). 왘 Take out the battery. 왘 Use a 10 mm open-end wrench to disconnect the negative lead from battery negative terminal 3 (컄 page 421). 왘 Remove the cover from the positive terminal. 왘 Use a 10 mm open-end wrench to disconnect the positive lead from battery positive terminal 2 (컄 page 421). Warning! 1 Water tray 2 Lock 422 G Practical hints Battery 왘 Charging and reinstalling battery Warning! G 왘 Never charge a battery while still installed in the vehicle unless the accessory battery charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in paint damage, corrosion or personal injury. An accessory battery charge unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available, permitting the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information and availability. Charge battery in accordance with the separate instructions for the accessory battery charger. Charge battery in accordance with the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer. Reinstall the charged battery. Follow the previously described steps in reverse order. ! The battery, its filler caps and the vent tube must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation. Reconnecting the battery 왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. 왘 Connect the positive lead and fasten its cover. 왘 Connect the negative lead. i The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of battery power (e.g. due to reconnection): 앫 Set the clock (컄 page 139). 앫 Synchronize the power windows (컄 page 251). Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Large 12-volt storage batteries contain lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. ! Never invert the terminal connections! 왘 Reinstall the water tray. 423 Practical hints Jump starting Warning! G Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death. Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting, as you could otherwise be injured. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and very explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc. Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury. Read all instructions before proceeding. 424 If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following: 앫 Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter are cold. 앫 Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw out first. 앫 Only jump start from batteries with the same voltage rating (12V). Jump starting with a more powerful battery could damage the vehicle’s electrical system, which will not be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 앫 Only use jumper cables with sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. 앫 Always make sure the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys, fans, or other parts that move when an engine is started or running. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit. If the engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter and may present a fire risk. Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery. Practical hints Jump starting Warning! G Keep flames or sparks away from battery. Do not smoke. 왘 Start the engine of the vehicle with the charged battery and run at idle speed. 왘 Connect negative terminal 4 of the charged battery with negative under hood terminal 3 in front of the water tray with the second jumper cable. Clamp the cable to negative terminal 4 of the charged battery first. 왘 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries (컄 page 314). 왘 Make sure the two vehicles do not touch. 왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. 왘 Apply parking brake. 왘 Shift gear selector lever* to position P (manual transmission to Neutral). 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 307). 왘 Flip up cover from positive under hood terminal 2 in front of water tray 1 (컄 page 422). 1 Positive terminal of charged battery 2 Positive under hood terminal in front of water tray 3 Negative under hood terminal in front of water tray 4 Negative terminal of charged battery 왘 Connect positive terminal 1 of the charged battery with positive under hood terminal 2 in front of the water tray with one jumper cable. Clamp the cable to positive terminal 1 of the charged battery first. You can now turn on the electrical consumers. Do not turn on the lights under any circumstances. 왘 Remove the jumper cables first from negative terminals 3 and 4 and then from positive terminals 2 and 1. You can now turn on the lights. 왘 Have the battery checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! i Never invert the terminal connections. Vehicles with automatic transmission*: Do not tow-start vehicle. 425 Practical hints Towing the vehicle Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission*: Do not tow-start vehicle. ! Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment with the SmartKey in the starter switch in position 0. Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports. To prevent damage during transport, do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts. Switch off the tow-away alarm (컄 page 88) and the automatic central locking (컄 page 101). 426 When circumstances do not permit the recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground or front wheels raised only so far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be employed. ! To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the transmission, however, we recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange for any towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage. ! If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1). Otherwise, the ESP® will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes. When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, the gear selector lever* must be in position N (manual transmission: gear shift lever in neutral position) and the SmartKey must be in starter switch position 1. When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground or the front axle raised, the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Practical hints Towing the vehicle Warning! G If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, always tow with a tow bar if: 앫 the engine will not run 앫 there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle. Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in starter switch position 2. If the SmartKey is left in starter switch position 0 for an extended period of time, it can no longer be turned in the switch. In this case, the steering is locked. To unlock, remove SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert. Warning! G With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. i To signal turns while being towed with the hazard warning flasher in use, switch on ignition and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in the usual manner – only the selected turn signal will operate. Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again. ! When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, please note the following: With the automatic central locking activated and the SmartKey in starter switch position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking, deactivate the automatic central locking (컄 page 101). Switch off the tow-away alarm (컄 page 88). The vehicle should only be towed using a properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts. 427 Practical hints Towing the vehicle i Front cover The gear selector lever* will remain locked in position P (vehicles with automatic transmission*) and the SmartKey will not turn in the starter switch if the battery is disconnected or discharged. See notes on the battery (컄 page 421) or on jump starting (컄 page 424). Vehicles with automatic transmission*: For information on manual unlocking of gear selector lever, see (컄 page 396). 1 Cover in front bumper Removing Installing towing eye bolt The towing eye bolt is supplied with the vehicle tool kit, located in the compartment underneath the trunk floor (컄 page 388). Unscrew the towing eye bolt using the lug wrench. 왘 To reinstall cover 1, tilt the marked lower left corner towards the opening. 왘 Maintaining its tilted position, insert cover 1 by applying the latches at the top left and lower right corner into the opening. 왘 To close cover 1, press on the diagonal opposite side of the marked corner until it fully engages. Press mark on cover 1. i 왘 Cover 1 springs open at the top right corner. Make sure the cover’s check strap does not get caught when closing. 왘 Pull at the protruding part of cover 1 and fold cover down to reveal the threaded hole for the towing eye bolt. Take vehicle tool kit out of trunk (컄 page 388). Do not disconnect cover 1 from its check strap. 왘 428 왘 왘 The towing eyes are located on the passenger side in the front and rear bumper. 왘 Installing Screw towing eye bolt in to its end stop and tighten with lug wrench. Practical hints Towing the vehicle Rear cover Removing Installing 왘 Press mark on cover 1. 왘 왘 Cover 1 springs open at the top. Unscrew the towing eye bolt using the lug wrench. 왘 Pull at the protruding part of cover 1 and fold cover down to reveal the threaded hole for the towing eye bolt. 왘 To reinstall cover 1, tilt the marked lower edge towards the opening. 왘 Maintaining its tilted position, insert cover 1 by applying the latches at the marked lower edge into the opening. 왘 To close cover 1, press on the unmarked top until it fully engages. Do not disconnect cover 1 from its check strap. 왘 1 Cover in rear bumper Screw towing eye bolt in to its end stop and tighten with lug wrench. i Make sure the cover’s check strap does not get caught when closing. 429 Practical hints Fuses Fuses are designed to protect the electrical circuits in your vehicle from a short circuit. If a fuse is blown, the component(s) and systems secured by that fuse will stop working. The following aids are available to help you replace fuses: 앫 Fuse chart 앫 Spare fuses 앫 Fuse extractor Warning! Aids for replacing fuses Never attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse. Have the cause determined and remedied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Fuse chart ! Keep the fuse boxes free by contamination and wetness. Otherwise, electrical parts or systems could be damaged. G Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz with the specified amperage for the system in question. Using other fuses may cause an overload and leading to a fire, and/or cause damage to electrical components and/or systems. 430 ! The electrical fuses are located in different fuse boxes: 앫 Main fuse box in passenger compartment (컄 page 431). 앫 Fuse box in engine compartment (컄 page 432). The fuse chart is located in the main fuse box in the passenger compartment (컄 page 431). The amperages of the fuses are also given there. Spare fuses Spare fuses are located in the vehicle tool kit in the spare wheel well (컄 page 388). Fuse extractor The fuse extractor is located in the vehicle tool kit in the spare wheel well (컄 page 388). Practical hints Fuses Main fuse box in passenger compartment Opening Closing 왘 Open the driver’s door. 왘 Attach cover 1 in the front. 왘 Insert flat, blunt object as a lever into recess on the edge of cover 1 at the position indicated by the arrow. 왘 Fold cover 1 in until it engages. 왘 Loosen cover 1 from dashboard using the lever. 왘 Using your hands, pull cover 1 out and remove. 1 Main fuse box cover ! Do not use sharp objects such as a screw driver to open the fuse box cover 1 in the dashboard, as this could damage it. 431 Practical hints Fuses Fuse box in engine compartment The fuse box is located in the engine compartment on the driver’s side. 1 Fuse box 2 Clamp 3 Fuse box cover 432 Opening Closing 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 307). 왘 왘 With a dry cloth, remove any moisture from the fuse box. Make sure the sealing rubber is properly positioned. 왘 Press fuse box cover 3 down and secure with clamps 2. 왘 Release clamps 2. 왘 Remove fuse box cover 3. Technical data Parts service Warranty coverage Identification labels Layout of poly-V-belt drive Engine Rims and tires Electrical system Main Dimensions Weights Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 433 Technical data Parts service The “Technical data” section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a stock of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service. More than 300 000 different parts for Mercedes-Benz models are available. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be installed. 434 ! The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety. Technical data Warranty coverage 왔 Warranty coverage Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties: 앫 New Vehicle Limited Warranty 앫 Emission System Warranty 앫 Emission Performance Warranty 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties, copies of which are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you. 435 Technical data Identification labels 1 Certification label (includes paintwork code) 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), located behind the passenger seat under the floor cover 3 Engine number (engraved on engine) 4 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield) 5 Vacuum line routing diagram label 6 Emission control information label, includes both federal and California certification exhaust emission standards i When ordering parts, please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers. 436 Technical data Layout of poly-V-belt drive 왔 Layout of poly-V-belt drive SLK 280, SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG 1 Idler pulley 2 Idler pulley 3 Automatic belt tensioner 4 Power steering pump 5 Air conditioning compressor 6 Crankshaft 7 Coolant pump 8 Generator (alternator) 1 Automatic belt tensioner 2 Power steering pump 3 Air conditioning compressor 4 Crankshaft 5 Coolant pump 6 Generator (alternator) 7 Idler pulley 437 Technical data Engine Model SLK 280 (171.454)1 SLK 350 (171.456)1 SLK 55 AMG (171.473)1 Engine 272 272 113 Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection No. of cylinders 6 6 8 Bore 3.47 in (88.00 mm) 3.66 in (92.90 mm) 3.82 in (97.00 mm) Stroke 3.24 in (82.20 mm) 3.39 in (86.00 mm) 3 3.60 in (92.00 mm) Total piston displacement 182.8 cu in (2996 cm ) 213.5 cu in (3498 cm ) 331.8 cu in (5439 cm3) Compression ratio 11.3:1 10.7:1 11:1 Output according to SAE J 1349 228 hp/6000 rpm (170 kW/6000 rpm) 268 hp/6000 rpm (200 kW/6000 rpm) 355 hp/5750 rpm2 (265 kW/5750 rpm) Maximum torque according to SAE J 1349 221 lb-ft/2700 - 5000 rpm (300 Nm/2700 - 5000 rpm) 258 lb-ft/2400 - 5000 rpm (350 Nm/2400 - 5000 rpm) 376 lb-ft/4000 rpm (510 Nm/4000 rpm) Maximum engine speed 6500 rpm 6500 rpm 6700 rpm Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 Poly-V-belt 2404 mm 2404 mm 2380 mm 1 2 2 3 2 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment. Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating. 438 Technical data Rims and tires 왔 Rims and tires ! i i Only use tires which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Tires approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed to provide best possible performance in conjunction with the driving safety systems on your vehicle such as ABS or ESP®. Tires specially developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding the following on the tire’s sidewall: For information on driving with MOExtended tires, see “MOExtended system*” (컄 page 333). Further information on tires and rims is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. A placard with the recommended tire inflation pressures is located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds (컄 page 328) or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition (컄 page 328). If such information is provided, it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap. The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with vehicle. 앫 MO = Mercedes-Benz Original equipment tires 앫 MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tires with limited run-flat characteristics) original equipment tires Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ! Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental effects, such as 앫 poor handling characteristics 앫 increased noise 앫 increased fuel consumption Moreover, tires and rims not approved by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteristics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the result. 439 Technical data Rims and tires i The following pages also list the approved wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicles with winter tires. Winter tires are not available as standard or optional factory equipment, but can be purchased from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Depending on vehicle model and the standard or optional factory-equipped wheel rim/tire configuration on your vehicle (Sport Package etc.), equipping your vehicle with winter tires approved for your vehicle model may also require the purchase of two or four wheel rims of the recommended size for use with these winter tires. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for more information. 440 Technical data Rims and tires Same size tires Model SLK 280 SLK 280 SLK 350 Summer tires1 - - Rims (light alloy) - - Wheel offset - - Winter tires1,2 205/55 R16 91H M+S. 225/45 R17 91H M+S. Rims (light alloy) 7 J x 16 H2 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset 1.34 in (34 mm) 1.42 in (36 mm) Winter tires*1,2,3 225/45 R17 91H M+S.MOExtended Rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset 1.42 in (36 mm) 1 Radial-ply tires Not available as factory equipment. 3 Must be used in conjunction with Run Flat Indicator* only. 2 441 Technical data Rims and tires Model SLK 280 (Sport Package*) SLK 350 (Sport Package*) SLK 55 AMG SLK 55 AMG SLK 55 AMG (Performance Package*) Summer tires1 - - Rims (light alloy) - - Wheel offset - - Winter tires1,2,3 205/50 R17 89H M+S. or 225/45 R17 91H M+S. 225/40 R18 92H XL (Extra Load) M+S. Rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 17 H2 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset 1.46 in (37 mm) 1.46 in (37 mm) 1 Radial-ply tires Not available as factory equipment. 3 For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 2 442 Technical data Rims and tires Mixed size tires SLK 280 SLK 280* SLK 350 Rims (light alloy) 7 J x 16 H2 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset 1.34 in (34 mm) 1.42 in (36 mm) 205/55 R16 91W 225/45 R17 91W or 225/45 R17 91W MOExtended 2 Rims (light alloy) 8 J x16 H2 8.5 J x17 H2 Wheel offset 1.18 in (30 mm) 1.18 in (30 mm) 225/50 R16 92W 245/40 R17 91W or 245/40 R17 91W MOExtended 2 Front axle: Summer tires 1 Rear axle: Summer tires 1,3 1 Radial-ply tires Must be used in conjunction with Run Flat Indicator* only. 3 Must not be used with snow chains. 2 443 Technical data Rims and tires SLK 280 (Sport Package*) SLK 350 (Sport Package*) SLK 55 AMG SLK 55 AMG (Performance Package*) Rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 17 H2 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset 1.46 in (37 mm) 1.46 in (37 mm) 225/45 R17 91W or 225/45 R17 91W MOExtended 2 225/40 ZR18 92Y XL (Extra Load) Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x17 H2 8.5 J x18 H2 Wheel offset 1.18 in (30 mm) 1.18 in (30 mm) 245/40 R17 91W or 245/40 R17 91W MOExtended 2 245/35 ZR18 92Y XL (Extra Load) Front axle: Summer tires1,3 Rear axle: Summer tires 1 1,3 Radial-ply tires Must be used in conjunction with Run Flat Indicator* only. 3 Must not be used with snow chains. 2 444 Technical data Rims and tires Spare wheel with collapsible tire All models Rim (light alloy) 4.5 B x 17 H2 Wheel offset 0.47 in (12 mm) Collapsible tire 145/70-17 92P1 1 Must not be used with snow chains. ! i Please compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim. Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the collapsible tire differs from the tire inflation pressure of the road tires. If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the collapsible tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim. Inflate the collapsible tire to approximately 51 psi (3.5 bar). i The SLK 55 AMG with Performance Package* does not have a spare wheel. The SLK 55 AMG with Performance Package* is equipped with TIREFIT (컄 page 408). 445 Technical data Electrical system Model SLK 280 SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG Generator (alternator) 14 V/150 A 14 V/150 A 14 V/150 A Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW 12 V/1.7 kW 12 V/1.7 kW Battery 12 V/62 Ah 12 V/74 Ah 12 V/74 Ah Spark plugs NGK PLKR 6A Bosch Platin Y 7 MPP33 NGK PLKR 6A NGK IFR6D10 Electrode gap 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.039 in (1.0 mm) Tightening torque 15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm) 15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm) 18 – 22 lb-ft (25 – 30 Nm) 446 Technical data Main Dimensions 왔 Main Dimensions Model SLK 280 SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG Overall vehicle length 160.7 in (4082 mm) 160.7 in (4082 mm) 160.9 in (4087 mm) Overall vehicle width 70.4 in (1788 mm) 70.4 in (1788 mm) 70.6 in (1794 mm) Overall vehicle height 51.0 in (1296 mm) 51.1 in (1298 mm) 50.0 in (1271 mm) Wheelbase 95.7 in (2430 mm) 95.7 in (2430 mm) 95.7 in (2430 mm) Track, front 60.2 in (1530 mm) 60.1 in (1526 mm) 60.0 in (1524 mm) Track, rear 61.0 in (1549 mm) 61.0 in (1549 mm) 61.0 in (1549 mm) 447 Technical data Weights Model SLK 280 SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG Maximum roof load 110 lb (50 kg) 110 lb (50 kg) Maximum trunk load 220 lb (100 kg) 220 lb (100 kg) ! ! This vehicle is not designed to carry items on its roof. Roof rails and any roof-mounted devices, unless expressly approved by Mercedes-Benz for use on this vehicle model, must not be used as they will damage the vehicle and retractable hardtop. This vehicle is not designed to carry any items on its trunk lid or accommodate any type of trunk lid rack or device. Using such devices may damage the vehicle and retractable hardtop mechanism. At time of printing, Mercedes-Benz does not offer any roof racks or any other roof-mounted devices for use on this vehicle. 448 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 왔 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Capacities Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Therefore, only use products tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Model Engine with oil filter Capacity SLK 280, SLK 350 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) SLK 55 AMG Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. Approved engine oils 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Automatic transmission* SLK 280, SLK 350 10.4 US qt (9.8 l) SLK 55 AMG Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. MB Automatic Transmission Fluid 10.4 US qt (9.8 l) Manual transmission SLK 280, SLK 350 1.6 US qt (1.5 l) MB Manual Transmission Oil Rear axle SLK 280 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 SLK 350 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) SLK 55 AMG 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) Power steering SLK 280, SLK 350 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) SLK 55 AMG MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S) 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) Front wheel hubs approx. 2.1 oz (60 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease Brake system 0.5 US qt (0.5 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+) 449 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Cooling system Fuel tank including a reserve of Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. SLK 280 approx. 10.4 US qt (9.8 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Agent SLK 350 approx. 11.2 US qt (10.2 l) SLK 55 AMG approx. 11.7 US qt (11.1 l) SLK 280, SLK 350 approx. 18.5 US gal (70.0 l) approx. 2.4 US gal (9.0 l) SLK 55 AMG approx. 18.5 US gal (70.0 l) approx. 2.6 US gal (10.0 l) Air conditioning system Premium unleaded gasoline: Minimum posted Octane 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON) R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12) Hydraulic system for retractable hardtop 0.19 US qt (0.18 l) MB Hydraulic Fluid Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system* 7.4 US qt (7.0 l) MB Windshield washer concentrate1 1 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate“S” and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 456). 450 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Engine oils Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines and durability for our service intervals. Therefore, only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Please follow Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) recommendations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Brake fluid During vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere. G Engine oil additives Warning! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. They may damage the engine. Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the system’s efficiency. Air conditioning refrigerant R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning system. Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil, otherwise damage to the system will occur. Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval. Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will provide you with additional information. 451 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Premium unleaded gasoline Warning! Fuel requirements ! G Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish all smoking materials. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline! To maintain the engine’s durability and performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions: 앫 Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon as possible. 앫 Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. 앫 Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two persons and no luggage. 앫 Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain. Only use premium unleaded fuel: 앫 The octane number (posted at the pump) must be 91 min. It is an average of both the Research (R) octane number and the Motor (M) octane number: (R+M)/2). This is also known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, IPA, IBA, and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10%; MTBE not to exceed 15%. The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents. Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements, such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc. 452 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Gasoline additives A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz only recommends the use of quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits. After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as: 앫 Warm-up hesitation 앫 Unstable idle 앫 Knocking/pinging 앫 Misfire 앫 Power loss In areas where carbon deposits may be encountered due to lack of availability of gasolines which contain these additives, Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of additives approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet for a listing of approved product(s). Follow directions on product label. Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel. This only results in unnecessary costs and may be harmful to engine operation. Damage or malfunction resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives other than those tested and approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles listed in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Coolants The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides: 앫 Corrosion protection 앫 Freeze protection 앫 Boiling protection (by increasing the boiling point) The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corrosion protection. If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approximately 266°F (130°C). The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase boil-over protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for information on replacement intervals. 453 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Coolant system design and coolant used determine the replacement interval. The replacement interval published in the Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved products of equal specification (see Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet) are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level. To provide important corrosion protection, the solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze protection to approx. -22°F [-30°C]). If you use a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection to approx. -49°F [-45°C]), the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze. 454 If the coolant level is low, water and MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage). Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instructions. The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements, which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water. If you are not sure about the water quality, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Anticorrosion/antifreeze Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.) Therefore, the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle: Mercedes-Benz 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze agent. Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in hot southern regions), you should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity Model Approx. freeze protection –35°F (–37°C) –49°F (–45°C) SLK 280, SLK 350 5.4 US qt (5.1 l) 6.0 US qt (5.6 l) SLK 55 AMG 5.9 US qt (5.5 l) 6.4 US qt (6.1 l) 455 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system* Warning! Both the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system* are supplied from the windshield washer fluid reservoir. Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned. G Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning* fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above freezing point, use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water: 앫 [40 ml (1.34 fl oz) “S” to 1 gallon (4 l) water] The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of approximately 7.4 US qt (7.0 l). 왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water (or concentrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures). 1 part “S” to100 parts water For temperatures below freezing point, use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze: 앫 1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent [40 ml (1.34 fl oz) “S” to 1 gallon (4 l) solvent]. 456 Technical terms ABS (Antilock Brake System) Prevents the wheels from locking up during braking so that the vehicle can continue to be steered. Accessory weight (컄 page 344) Air pressure (컄 page 344) AIRSCARF neck-level heating* AIRSCARF neck-level heating provides the surrounding area of the occupants’ necks with a heated air stream flowing from openings in the head restraints. BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system This system detects if a special system-compatible child restraint seat is installed on the passenger seat. The system will automatically deactivate the passenger front air bag when such a seat is properly installed (the 75 indicator lamp located in the center console comes on and remains illuminated). Alignment bolt Metal pin with thread. The centering pin is an aid used when changing a tire to align the wheel with the wheel hub. BabySmartTM compatible child seats Special restraint system for children. The sensor system for the passenger seat prevents deployment of the passenger front air bag if a BabySmartTM compatible child seat is installed. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability. Aspect ratio (컄 page 344) Bar (컄 page 344) BAS (Brake Assist System) System for potentially reducing braking distances in emergency braking situations. The system is activated when it senses an emergency based on how fast the brake is applied. Bead (컄 page 344) Bi-Xenon headlamps* Headlamps which use an electric arc as the light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps. Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low beam and high beam. CAC (Customer Assistance Center) Mercedes-Benz customer service center, which can help you with any questions about your vehicle and provide assistance in the event of a breakdown. 457 Technical terms CAN system (Controller Area Network) Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or windshield wiping. Cockpit All instruments, switches, buttons and indicator/warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle operation and monitoring. Cold tire inflation pressure (컄 page 344) Collapsible tire An especially compact spare tire that must be inflated with a provided air pump before using. It should only be used to bring the vehicle to the nearest service station. 458 COMAND* (Cockpit Management and Data System) Information and operating center for vehicle sound and communications systems, including the radio, CD changer and navigation system, as well as other optional equipment (e.g. telephone). Control system The control system is used to call up vehicle information and to change component settings. Information and messages appear in the multifunction display. The driver uses the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to navigate through the system and to adjust settings. Cruise control Driving convenience system for automatically maintaining the vehicle speed set by the driver. Curb weight (컄 page 344) DOT (Department of Transportation) (컄 page 344) Engine number The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the cylinder block to uniquely identify each engine produced. Engine oil viscosity Measurement for the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The higher the temperature an oil can tolerate without becoming thin, or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without becoming viscous, the better the viscosity. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Improves vehicle handling and directional stability. Technical terms ETD (Emergency Tensioning Device) Device which deploys in certain frontal and rear collisions exceeding the system’s threshold to tighten the seat belts. ->SRS Gear range* Number of gears which are available to the automatic transmission for shifting. The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the selector lever. FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) (Flexible Service System PLUS) Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when the next vehicle maintenance service is due. FSS PLUS evaluates engine temperature, oil level, vehicle speed, engine speed, distance driven and the time elapsed since your last maintenance service, and calls for the next maintenance service accordingly. GPS (Global Positioning System) Satellite-based system for relaying geographic location information to and from vehicles equipped with special receivers. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (컄 page 344) GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (컄 page 344) GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (컄 page 345) Head-thorax air bag Installed in the doors, these air bags protect occupants during side impact collisions exceeding a preset threshold. Unlike normal side air bags, head-thorax air bags are also designed to provide protection for the head area. Instrument cluster The displays and indicator/warning lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer, coolant temperature and fuel gauge. Kickdown* Depressing the accelerator past the point of resistance shifts the automatic transmission down to the lowest possible gear. This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal acceleration needs. Kilopascal (kPa) (컄 page 345) 459 Technical terms Line of fall The direct line an object moves downhill when influenced by the force of gravity alone. Locking knob Button on the door which indicates whether the door is locked or unlocked. Pushing the locking knob down on an individual door from inside locks that door. Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when the next vehicle maintenance service is due. The Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks distance driven and the time elapsed since your last maintenance service, and calls for the next maintenance service accordingly. 460 Maximum loaded vehicle weight (컄 page 345) Maximum load rating (컄 page 345) Multifunction display Two display fields in the instrument cluster used to present information provided by the control system. Maximum tire inflation pressure (컄 page 345) Multifunction steering wheel Steering wheel with buttons for operating the control system. Memory function* Used to store three individual seat, steering wheel and mirror positions. Normal occupant weight (컄 page 345) MON (Motor Octane Number) The Motor Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline’s ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both the MON (Motor Octane Number) and ->RON (Research Octane Number) is posted at the pump, also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. Overspeed range Engine speeds within the red marking of the tachometer dial. Avoid this engine speed range, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Poly-V-belt drive Drives engine components (alternator, AC compressor, etc.) from the engine. Technical terms Power train Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit motive power to the drive axles, including 앫 Engine 앫 Clutch/torque converter 앫 Transmission 앫 Transfer case 앫 Drive shaft 앫 Differential 앫 Axle shafts/axles Production options weight (컄 page 345) Program mode selector switch* Used to switch the automatic transmission between standard operation (S) and comfort operation (C). Vehicles with steering wheel gearshift control and manual shift program: in addition to S and C (for regular S or comfort C operation, see above), you can use M for manual shift program. PSI (Pounds per square inch) (컄 page 345) Recommended tire inflation pressure (컄 page 345) REST (Residual engine heat utilization) Feature that uses the engine heat stored in the coolant to heat the vehicle interior for a short time after the engine has been turned off. Restraint systems Seat belts, belt tensioners, air bags and child restraint systems. As independent systems, their protective functions complement one another. Rim (컄 page 345) Retractable hardtop Hardtop that can be opened and closed at the push of a button and stored in the trunk. 461 Technical terms Roll bar Occupant protection system which consists of tubular steel sheathed in plastic. RON (Research Octane Number) The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline’s ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both the ->MON (Motor Octane Number) and RON (Research Octane Number) is posted at the pump, also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. Shift lock* When the vehicle with automatic transmission is parked, this lock prevents the gear selector lever from being inadvertently moved out of position P without the SmartKey turned and the brake pedal depressed. 462 Sidewall (컄 page 345) SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Seat belts, emergency tensioning device and air bags. Though independent systems, they are closely interfaced to provide effective occupant protection. Tele Aid system (Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand) The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response: automatic and manual emergency, Roadside Assistance and information. Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call. The Tele Aid system is operational provided that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available. Tightening torque Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug wrench) with which threaded fasteners such as wheel bolts are tightened. TIN (Tire Identification Number) (컄 page 346) Tire load rating (컄 page 346) Tire ply composition and material used (컄 page 346) Tire speed rating (컄 page 346) Traction (컄 page 346) Tread (컄 page 346) Treadwear indicators (컄 page 346) Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (컄 page 346) Technical terms Vehicle capacity weight (컄 page 346) Vehicle maximum load on the tire (컄 page 346) VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the body to uniquely identify each vehicle produced. Wind screen Screen for deflecting wind from the vehicle interior when the hardtop is lowered. 463 464 Index A ABS 82, 457 Display message 370 Indicator lamp 362 Accessory weight 344 Accident 58 Adjusting (Getting started) 38 Air bags 65 BabySmartTM 77, 457 Children 66 Front 70 Head-thorax 71, 459 Kneebag 70 Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 78 Safety guidelines 68 Air conditioning Automatic climate control* 200 Climate control 187 Air conditioning refrigerant 451 Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure AIRSCARF neck level heating* (Seats) 105, 457 Alarm system see Anti-theft systems Alignment bolt (Vehicle tool kit) 388, 415, 457 Anticorrosion/antifreeze 454 Antilock brake system see ABS Anti-theft systems 87 Alarm system 87 Immobilizer 87 Tow-away alarm 88 Ashtray 269 Aspect ratio 344 AUDIO menu (Control system) 129 Audio system 203 Audio and telephone*, operation 203 CD changer* 223 CD operation 219 Introduction to satellite radio* (USA only) 214 MP3 220 Operating and display elements 204 Auto-dimming* for rear view mirrors 174 Automatic climate control* Air conditioning 200 Automatic mode, basic setting 194 Control panel 192 Deactivating 194 Overview 190 Automatic locking Control system 147 When driving 101 Automatic shift program* 163 Automatic transmission* 157 Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) 313 Driving 53 Emergency operation (Limp Home Mode) 172 Fluid level 313 Gear ranges 160 Gear selector lever 157 Gear selector lever (Unlocking manually) 396 Gear shifting malfunctions 172 Gearshift pattern 51 Kickdown 162 Manual shifting 164 One-touch gearshifting 164 Program mode selector switch 163 465 Index B BabySmartTM Air bag deactivation system 457 Compatible child seats 76, 457 Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 77 Back-up lamp 401 Bar 344 BAS 83, 457 Battery (SmartKey) Replacing 398 Battery (Vehicle) 314, 421 Jump starting 424 Bead 344 Bi-Xenon* 457 Headlamps 401 Brake Assist System see BAS Brakes 294 Brake fluid 306, 451 Display message 375 SLK 55 AMG 295 Warning lamp 363 Break-in period 292 Bulbs Front/rear lamps 401 Replacing 400, 401 466 C CAC 457 California, important notice 11 CAN system 458 Capacities (Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.) 449 Cargo compartment cover 253 Carpets, cleaning 359 Catalytic converter 302 CD Changer* 219, 266 Player/Changer*, operation 131, 219 CD changer* (Audio system) 223 Center console 28 Lamp 367 Central locking Automatic 101, 147 From outside (SmartKey) 62 Locking/unlocking from inside 102 Certification label 436 CHECK ENGINE indicator lamp 364 Child safety Air bags 66 Children in the vehicle 75 Cigarette lighter 270 Cleaning tires 319 Climate control 178 Air conditioning 187 Air recirculation mode 185 Control panel, overview 179 Switching on/off 181 Clock 122 Cockpit 458 Overview 22 Cold tire inflation pressure 344 Collapsible tire 458 Collapsible wheel chock 390 COMAND* 122, 458 Navigation 132 Radio transmitter 301 Combination switch 114 High beam flasher 114 High beam headlamps 55, 114 Low beam headlamps 55 Turn signals 55 Windshield wipers 56 Comfort driving Transmission program mode* 163 Compatible child seat see BabySmartTM Index Control system 123, 458 AUDIO menu 129 Convenience* submenu 147 Coolant temperature 128 Instrument cluster submenu 137 Lighting submenu 143 Maintenance service indicator 350 Menus 124 Messages in display 368 Multifunction display 123 Multifunction steering wheel 124 NAV* menu 132 Overview (Menus) 126 Overview (Settings submenus) 136 Resetting 134 Settings menu 134 Standard display 128 TEL* menu 151 Time/date submenu 139 Trip computer menu 149 Vehicle status message memory menu 132 Vehicle submenu 147 Controller Area Network see CAN system Convenience closing* Power windows 249 Retractable hardtop 257 Coolant 313 Adding water 306 Anticorrosion/antifreeze 454 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 453 Technical data 449 Temperature 303 Temperature, checking (Control system) 128 Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* (Lighting) 115 Cruise control 260, 458 Display message 370 Cup holder 268 Curb weight 344 Customer Assistance Center see CAC D Date (Control system) 141, 142 Daytime running lamp mode 112 Control system 143 Deep water see Standing water Defrosting Rear window 177 Windshield (Automatic climate control*) 197 Windshield (Climate control) 184 Department of Transportation see DOT Difficulties with starting 52 Direction of rotation (Tires) 320 Display text see Messages in display Doors Control panel, overview 31 Entry lamps 119 Locking/unlocking from outside 95 Opening from inside 97 Unlocking with Tele Aid 280 DOT 344 Drink holder see Cup holder Drinking and driving 293 Driver’s air bag see Air bags 467 Index Driver’s door Locking in an emergency 395 Unlocking in an emergency 394 Driving 53 Automatic transmission* 53 Driving off 296 Fuel saving 293 Hydroplaning 297 In winter 299 Instructions 47, 293 Manual transmission 53 Standing water 300 Tires 297 Traveling abroad 301 Driving safety systems 82 ABS 82 BAS 83 ESP® 84 468 E Easy-entry/exit feature* 43, 148 Electric air pump 391 Electric air pump (Vehicle tool kit) 388 Electrical system (Technical data) 446 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® Emergency call (911) 243 Emergency call system 273 Tele Aid 275 Emergency operations Automatic transmission* 172 Releasing trunk lid from inside 100 Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) 280 Retractable hardtop 397 Selector lever*, unlocking manually 396 Unlocking/locking the vehicle 394 Emergency tensioning device see ETD Emission control 302, 436 Engine Cleaning see Vehicle care Compartment 307 Driving after replacement 292 Number 436, 458 Technical data 438 Turning off 61 Engine oil 308, 451 Adding 312 Additives 451 Checking level (Control system) 309 Checking level (Dipstick) 311 Consumption 308 Display message 310 Viscosity 458 ESP® 84, 458 Display message 371 Warning lamp 365 ETD 73, 74, 459 Safety guidelines 68 Seat belt force limiter 74 Exterior lamp switch 110 Exterior lighting Lamps 401 Replacing bulbs 401 Exterior rear view mirrors see Mirrors Index F First aid kit 388 Flat tire 408 Inflating collapsible spare tire 417 Lifting vehicle 413 Lowering vehicle 419 Mounting spare wheel 412, 415 TIREFIT kit* 408 Floormat (Driver’s side only) 271 Fog lamps 113, 401 Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* 115 Footwell lighting* 118 FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) 459 Control system 350 Fuel Additives 453 Consumption statistics (Control system) 149 Filler flap 304 Fuel tank capacity 450 MON 304 Premium unleaded gasoline 304, 452 Refueling 304 Reserve warning lamp 365, 366 RON 304 Technical data 449 Fuel filler flap Localization 25 Fuel gauge (Instrument cluster) 25 Fuse extractor (Vehicle tool kit) 388 Fuses 430 Auxiliary fuse box 432 Main fuse box 431 Spare fuses (Vehicle tool kit) 388 G Garage door opener* 281 Gasoline see Fuel GAWR 344 Gear range (Automatic transmission*) 160, 459 Limiting 160 Shifting into optimal 164 Gear selector lever (Automatic transmission*) 157 Position 157, 159 Global locking/unlocking see SmartKey Global Positioning System see GPS Glove box 266 Good visibility 173 GPS 87, 88, 459 Tele Aid system 273 Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW GSM network phones (Telephone*) 229 GVW 344 GVWR 345 469 Index H Hard plastic trim items, cleaning 359 Hazard warning flasher 117 Head restraint height (Seats) 41 Headlamps Bi-Xenon* 401, 457 Cleaning system* 173, 315, 456 Night security illumination (Control system) 145 Switching off 60 Switching on 55 Headliner, cleaning 360 Head-thorax air bag 71, 459 Heating Seats* 104 Steering wheel* 288 High beam Flasher 115 Headlamps 55, 115 Headlamps, bulbs 401 High mounted brake lamp 401 High-performance brake system (SLK 55 AMG) 295 Hood 307 Horn 23 Hydroplaning 297 470 I Identification labels see Labels Ignition (Position in starter switch) 36 Immobilizer see Anti-theft systems Infant and child restraint systems 75 Instrument cluster 25, 120, 459 Clock 122 Lamps, indicator and warning 362 Overview 24 Instruments and controls see Cockpit Interior rear view mirror see Mirrors Intermittent/interval wiping see Windshield wipers J Jack (Vehicle tool kit) 388 Lifting vehicle 413 Lowering vehicle 419 Jump starting 424 K Key 209 Kickdown (Automatic transmission*) 162, 459 Kilopascal 345 Kneebag see Air bags Index L Labels 436 Lamp in center console 367 Lamps in instrument cluster 362 Lamps, indicator and warning ABS 362 Battery (SmartKey) 95 Brakes 363 CHECK ENGINE 364 ESP® 84, 86, 365 Fuel reserve 365, 366 Passenger front air bag off 367 Seat belts 366 SRS 64, 65, 366 Language in multifunction display (Control system) 137 Layout of poly-V-belt drive 437 License plate lamps 401 Light alloy wheels Cleaning 358 Technical data 441, 442 Lighter see Cigarette lighter Lighting 110 Combination switch 114 Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* 115 Daytime running lamp mode 112 Door entry lamps 119 Exterior lamp switch 110 Exterior lamps, cleaning 357 Fog lamps 113 Footwell lighting* 118 Hazard warning flasher 117 Headlamp mode, automatic/manual 111 High beam 115 High beam flasher 115 Individual settings (Control system) 143 Instrument cluster illumination 120 Interior lighting 117 Low beam headlamps 110 Night security illumination (Control system) 145 Reading lamps 119 Standing lamps 110 Trunk 118 Limp Home Mode (Automatic transmission*) 172 Line of fall 460 Loading 265, 320, 344 Loading the vehicle 320 Locator lighting (Control system) 144 Locking And parking 59 Centrally (Control system) 147 Centrally from inside 102 Locking knob (Doors) 97, 460 Locking the vehicle 62 Long trip, checking before 305 Loss of Service and Warranty Booklet 435 SmartKey or mechanical key 97 Low beam headlamps 110, 401 Lubricants, technical data 449 471 Index M Main dimensions 447 Maintenance service indicator (Control system) 350 Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) 460 Service indicator, calling up 351 Manual seat see Seats Manual shift program SLK 55 AMG 169 Manual transmission 155 Driving 53 Gearshift pattern 51 Starting with SmartKey 51 Maximum inflation pressure 345 Maximum load rating 345 Maximum loaded vehicle weight 345 Mechanical key see SmartKey Memory function* 107, 460 Menus AUDIO 129 Convenience* submenu 147 Instrument cluster submenu 137 Lighting submenu 143 NAV* 132 Overview (Control system) 126, 127, 136 472 Settings 134 Settings submenus 135 Standard display 128 TEL* 151 Time/Date submenu 139 Trip computer 149 Vehicle status message memory 132 Vehicle submenu 147 Messages in display 368 Cruise control 370 ESP® 371 Maintenance service indicator 350 SRS 372 Symbols 374 Transmission 372 Vehicle status message memory 132 Mirror lamp* see Sun visors Mirrors 173 Additional turn signals 401 Adjusting 45 Antiglare position 173 Auto-dimming* 174 Exterior rear view mirrors 45 Interior rear view mirror 45 Parking position* 108, 148, 175 MOExtended system* 333 MON 304, 460 Motor Octane Number see MON MP3 220 Multifunction display 123, 460 Engine oil messages 309 Messages 132 Messages with symbols 374 Messages with text 368 Operation see Control system Multifunction steering wheel 26, 124, 460 Heating* 288 Index N NAV* menu 132 Navigation system see NAV* Neck-level heating see AIRSCARF* (Seats) Night security illumination (Control system) 145 Normal occupant weight 345 O Occupant distribution 345 Occupant safety 64 Children 66, 75 Infant and child restraint systems 72, 75 Seat belts 47, 68, 71 Oil see Engine oil One-touch gearshifting* 164 Operating safety 16, 203 Operating vehicle outside the USA and Canada 13 Operator’s Manual 10 Ornamental moldings see Vehicle care Outside temperature indicator 121, 129 Outside temperature/speed 138 Overhead control panel 30 Overspeed range 121, 460 P Paintwork see Vehicle care Panic alarm 80 Parcel net (Storage compartment) 267 Parking 296 And locking 59 Parking aid see Parking position* Parking brake 52, 59 Parking lamps 110, 401 Parking position* 108 Activation (Control system) 148 Exterior rear view mirrors 175 Parts service 434 Passenger air bag see Air bags Passenger compartment 301 Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 367 Passenger safety see Occupant safety Phone book see Telephone* Plastic parts, cleaning 359 Poly-V-belt drive 437, 460 Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires 332 Power outlet 271 Power seat* see Seats Power train 461 Power washer see Vehicle care Power windows 246 Operating rear side windows 248 Operating with retractable hardtop switch 248 Summer opening/convenience closing* 249 Synchronizing 251 Practical hints Fuses 430 Lamps in instrument cluster 362 Spare wheel bolts 392 Towing vehicle 426 Vehicle jack 389 What to do if... 362 Premium unleaded gasoline 452 Problems While driving 58 With vehicle 17 Product information 9 Production options weight 345 Program mode selector switch* 461 Automatic transmission* 163 PSI 345 473 Index R Radio Operation (Audio system) 209 Operation (Control system) 129 Satellite* (USA only) 130 Radio transmitters, control and operation 301 Reading lamps 119 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Rear window defroster 177 Recommended inflation pressure 345 Recovery services for stolen vehicle (Tele Aid) 280 Refrigerant (Air conditioning) 451 Refueling 304 Regular checks 305 Remote control see SmartKey Remote door unlock with Tele Aid 280 Reporting, safety defects 18 Research Octane Number see RON Reset button (Instrument cluster) 25 Residual engine heat utilization see REST 474 REST 461 Automatic climate control* 202 Climate control 188 Restraint systems 461 Retractable hardtop 252, 461 Locking after raising/lowering 255 Opening and closing 252 Operating manually 397 Problems when operating 255 Summer opening/convenience closing* 257 Wind screen 259 Rims 345, 439 Roadside Assistance 12, 277 Roll bar 462 RON 304, 462 Roof rack 265 Rubber parts, cleaning 359 Run Flat Indicator* 329 S Safety belts see Seat belts Safety defects, reporting 18 Safety, occupant 64 Satellite radio* (USA only) 130, 214 Seat belts 71 Cleaning 360 Fastening 47 Force limiter 74 Proper use of 49, 73 Release button 49 Safety guidelines 68 Warning lamp 366 Seating capacity 322 Seats 104 Adjusting 38 Easy-entry/exit feature* 43 Head restraint height 41 Heating* 104 Power seats* 40 Selective setting see SmartKey Selector lever* lock 51, 462 Index Service Information 12 Maintenance Booklet 12 Service and warranty Booklet 435 Information 10 Service life (Tires) 318 Service system Maintenance service indicator 350 Parts service 434 Settings menu (Control system) 134 Shelf behind roll bar 268 Shelf below rear window, cleaning 360 Shift lock* 462 Side marker lamps 401 Side windows see Power windows Sidewall 345 SmartKey 92 Checking batteries 97 Factory setting 94 Global locking 95 Global unlocking 94 Locking and unlocking 92 Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key 97 Mechanical key 394 Panic button 80 Positions in starter switch 36 Power windows, opening/closing* 249 Remote control 92 Replacing batteries 398 Restoring to factory setting 96 Retractable hardtop, opening/closing* 257 Selective setting 95 Starting engine 50 Turning off engine 61 Unlocking the trunk lid 96 Snow chains 349 Spare fuses (Vehicle tool kit) 388 Spare parts see Parts service Spare wheel 391 SRS 73, 462 Display message 372 Indicator lamp 366 Standard display menu (Control system) 128 Standing lamps 110, 401 Standing water, driving instructions 300 Starter switch positions 36 Starting 36, 50 Difficulties with 52 Position in starter switch 36 Steering column see Steering wheel Steering wheel Adjusting 42 Heating* 288 Steering wheel gearshift control SLK 280* 165 SLK 350* 165 SLK 55 AMG 167 Stolen vehicle, Recovery services (Tele Aid) 280 Storage compartments 266 Storing tires 319 Summer opening* Power windows 249 Retractable hardtop 257 Sun visors 176 Supplemental Restraint System see SRS Symbols in display 374 475 Index T Tachometer 121 Tail lamps 401 Tar stains see Vehicle care TDMA or CDMA network phones (Telephone*) 236 Technical data Air conditioning refrigerant 451 Brake fluid 451 Coolants 453 Electrical system 446 Engine 438 Engine oil 451 Fuel additives 453 Fuel requirements 452 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 449 Headlamp cleaning system* 456 Main dimensions 447 Parts service 434 Premium unleaded gasoline 452 Rims and tires 439 Weights 448 Windshield washer system 456 476 Tele Aid system 273, 462 Call priority 279 Initiating an emergency call 276 Remote door unlock 280 Requirements 273 Roadside Assistance 277 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 280 System self-check 274 Telephone* 272 Compartment 266 GSM network phones 229 Operation 151, 203 Tightening torque 462 Wheel bolts 419 Time and date synchronization with head unit* (Control system) 139 TIN 346 Tire and Loading Information 321 Tire and loading terminology 344 Tire care and maintenance 318 Tire Identification Number see TIN Tire inflation pressure 410 Air pressure 344 Checking 327, 329 Tire inflation pressure see the placard on the fuel filler flap Tire inspection 318 Tire load rating 346 Tire ply composition and material used 346 Tire speed rating 336, 346 Tire terminology 344 TIREFIT kit* (Vehicle tool kit) 388, 389 TIREFIT* Instructions for use 408 Tires 317, 439 Cleaning 319 Collapsible (Spare wheel) 458 Direction of rotation 320 Driving instructions 297 Flat tire 408 Important guidelines 317 Inflating with air pump 417 MOExtended system* 333 Mounting wheel 415 Index Removing wheel 415 Retreads 317 Rims and tires 439 Rotating 347 Run Flat Indicator* 329 Service life 318 Sizes 439 Snow chains 349 Spare wheel 391 Speed rating 298 Storing 319 Supplemental tire inflation pressure information 304 Temperature 343 Traction 298 Tread depth 319, 348 Treadwear indicators (TWI) 297 Wear pattern 347 Wheel chock (Vehicle tool kit) 388 Winter 348 Tools see Vehicle tool kit Tow-away alarm see Anti-theft systems Towing (Vehicle) 426 Traction 163, 346 Transmission, display message 372 Transporting the vehicle 89 Traveling abroad 301 Tread 346 Tread depth 319, 348 Treadwear indicators 297, 346 Trip computer menu (Control system) 149 Trunk 98 Cargo compartment cover 253 Lighting 118 Trunk lid emergency release 100 Trunk lid lock 395 Unlocking with SmartKey 96 Turn signals 55, 401 Additional in mirrors 401 TWI see Treadwear indicators U Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 346 Unlocking 34 Centrally from inside 102 In an emergency 280 With SmartKey 34 Upholstery Cleaning 360 Useful features Ashtray 269 Cigarette lighter 270 Cup holder 268 Floormat (Driver’s side only) 271 Garage door opener* 281 Heated steering wheel* 288 Parcel net 267 Power outlet 271 Storage compartments, interior 266 Tele Aid 273 Telephone* 272 477 Index V Valve extractor (Vehicle tool kit) 388 Vehicle Battery 314, 421 Bulbs 401 Fuses 430 Individual settings (Control system) 134 Jump starting 424 Lifting with jack 413 Locking 62 Proper use of 16 Towing 426 Unlocking/locking in an emergency 394 Vehicle capacity weight 346 Vehicle care 353 Vehicle Identification Number see VIN Vehicle jack 389 Vehicle loading terminology 344 Vehicle status message memory menu (Control system) 132 Vehicle tool kit 388 Collapsible wheel chock 390 Vehicle washing see Vehicle care VIN 436, 463 478 W Warning sounds Anti-theft alarm system 87 Driver’s seat belt 71 Exterior lighting 61, 111 Maintenance service indicator 351 Panic alarm 80 Parking brake 53, 363 Tow-away alarm 88 Warranty coverage 435 Washing the vehicle see Vehicle care Wear pattern (Tires) 347 Weights 448 Wheel bolts 392 Wheel chock (Vehicle tool kit) 388 Wheel wrench (Vehicle tool kit) 388 Wheels see Tires Wheels, tightening torque 419 Where will I find...? 388 Wind screen 259, 463 Windows see Power windows Windshield Washer fluid reservoir 315 Washer system 456 Windshield wipers 56 Replacing wiper blades 406 Wiper blades, cleaning 357 Winter driving 348 Instructions 299 Snow chains 349 Tires 348 Winter tires see Tires Wood trims, cleaning 360 Service and Literature Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle. For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca. G Warning! To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury. If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing. Title illustration no. P00.01-2930-31 Press time April 8, 2005 GSP/TIP Printed in Germany
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Create Date : 2005:04:22 07:52:00Z Modify Date : 2005:04:22 10:00:01+02:00 Page Count : 481 Creation Date : 2005:04:22 07:52:00Z Mod Date : 2005:04:22 10:00:01+02:00 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows) Author : nicu Metadata Date : 2005:04:22 10:00:01+02:00 Creator : nicu Title : 171_BA.boo Page Mode : UseOutlinesEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools